Mazda Automobile 2008 B2300 Truck User Manual

Table of Contents  
Introduction  
4
Instrument Cluster  
12  
Warning lights and chimes  
Gauges  
12  
17  
Entertainment Systems  
19  
AM/FM stereo  
19  
21  
26  
32  
35  
AM/FM stereo with single CD  
AM/FM stereo with CDX6/MP3  
Auxiliary input jack (Line in)  
Satellite radio information  
Climate Controls  
39  
Heater only  
Manual heating and air conditioning  
39  
40  
Lights  
42  
Headlamps  
Turn signal control  
Bulb replacement  
42  
46  
46  
Driver Controls  
53  
Windshield wiper/washer control  
Steering wheel adjustment  
Power windows  
Mirrors  
Speed control  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
Locks and Security  
62  
Keys  
Locks  
Anti-theft system  
62  
62  
66  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Maintenance and Specifications  
213  
Engine compartment  
Engine oil  
Battery  
Engine coolant  
Fuel information  
Air filter(s)  
223  
227  
233  
235  
241  
258  
Maintenance product specifications and capacities  
Engine data  
260  
264  
Accessories  
Index  
268  
269  
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical  
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval  
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written  
authorization from MNAO. MNAO may change the contents without notice and  
without incurring obligation.  
Copyright © 2007 MNAO  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning  
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and  
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to  
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or  
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in  
vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or  
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer  
and birth defects or other reproductive harm.  
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL  
Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules, seat belt  
pretensioners, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material  
– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.  
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.  
CONGRATULATIONS  
Congratulations on acquiring your new Mazda product. Please take the  
time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook.  
The more you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the  
safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it.  
For more information on Mazda and its products visit the following  
website:  
In the United States: www.mazdausa.com  
In Canada: www.mazda.ca  
Additional owner information is given in separate publications or refer to  
the Mazda importers/distributors section in the Customer Assistance  
chapter.  
This Owner’s Manual describes every option and model variant available  
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your  
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe  
options before they are generally available.  
Remember to pass on the Owner’s Manual when reselling the vehicle. It  
is an integral part of the vehicle.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
WARNING: In the event of an accident the Fuel pump shut-off  
switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the engine.  
The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.  
collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel  
pump shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.  
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION  
Warning symbols in this guide  
How can you reduce the risk of  
personal injury to yourself or  
others? In this guide, answers to  
such questions are contained in  
comments highlighted by a bold  
WARNING statement. These comments should be read and observed.  
Warning symbols on your vehicle  
When you see this symbol, it is  
imperative that you consult the  
relevant section of this guide before  
touching or attempting adjustment  
of any kind.  
Protecting the environment  
We must all play our part in  
protecting the environment. Correct  
vehicle usage and the authorized  
disposal of waste, cleaning and  
lubrication materials are significant  
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this  
guide with the tree symbol.  
Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow  
your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing  
of automotive fluids.  
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE  
There are no particular breaking-in rules for your vehicle. During the  
first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of driving, vary speeds frequently. This is  
necessary to give the moving parts a chance to break in.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
SPECIAL NOTICES  
Emission warranty  
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper to Bumper  
Coverage, Safety Restraint Coverage and Corrosion Coverage. In addition,  
your vehicle is eligible for Emissions Defect and Emissions Performance  
Warranties. For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not  
covered, refer to the Warranty Information Booklet that is provided to  
you along with your Owner’s Manual.  
Event Data Recorder  
The computer in your vehicle is capable of recording detailed data  
potentially including but not limited to information such as:  
the use of restraint systems including seat belts by the driver and  
passengers,  
information about the performance of various systems and modules in  
the vehicle, and  
information related to engine, throttle, steering, brake or other system  
status potentially including information related to how the driver  
operates the vehicle including but not limited to vehicle speed.  
This information may be stored during regular operation or in a crash or  
near crash event. This stored information may be read out and used by:  
service and repair facilities.  
law enforcement or government agencies.  
the Manufacturer and Distributor.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Special instructions  
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic  
controls.  
WARNING: Please read the section Airbag supplemental  
restraint system (SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints  
chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions  
could result in personal injury.  
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats  
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.  
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles  
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover  
rate than other types of vehicles.  
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Manual  
carefully. Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of  
this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of  
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.  
Using your vehicle with a snowplow  
WARNING: Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.  
Your vehicle is not equipped with a snowplowing package.  
Using your vehicle as an ambulance  
WARNING: Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.  
Your vehicle is not equipped with an ambulance preparation package.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.  
Vehicle Symbol Glossary  
Safety Alert  
See Owner’s Manual  
Fasten Seat Belt  
Airbag - Side  
Protecting the  
Environment  
Airbag - Front  
Child Seat Lower  
Anchor  
Child Seat Tether  
Anchor  
Brake System  
Anti-Lock Brake System  
Brake Fluid -  
Non-Petroleum Based  
Parking Brake System  
Parking Aid System  
Master Lighting Switch  
Fog Lamps-Front  
Stability Control System  
Hazard Warning Flasher  
Fuse Compartment  
Fuel Pump Reset  
Windshield Wash/Wipe  
Windshield  
Rear Window  
Defrost/Demist  
Defrost/Demist  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Vehicle Symbol Glossary  
Power Window Lockout  
Power Windows  
Personal Alarm System  
Feature  
Engine Oil  
Engine Coolant  
Temperature  
Engine Coolant  
Do Not Open When Hot  
Battery  
Avoid Smoking, Flames,  
or Sparks  
Battery Acid  
Fan Warning  
Explosive Gas  
MAX  
Maintain Correct Fluid  
Level  
MIN  
Power Steering Fluid  
Service Engine Soon  
Engine Air Filter  
Jack  
Passenger Compartment  
Air Filter  
Check fuel cap  
Speed Control  
Low Tire Pressure  
Warning  
INFORMATION ABOUT THIS GUIDE  
The information found in this guide was accurate at the time of printing.  
Mazda may change the contents without notice.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Instrument cluster  
(pg. 12)  
Instrument panel dimmer  
control  
(pg. 43)  
Headlamp control  
(pg. 42)  
Turn signal and  
wiper/washer control  
(pg. 53)  
Speed control*  
(pg. 57)  
Driver air bag  
(pg. 86)  
Hood release  
(pg. 222)  
Parking brake release  
(pg. 153)  
* If equipped  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Audio system  
(pg. 19)  
4wd control*  
(pg. 162)  
Passenger airbag  
indicator  
(pg. 91)  
Cigar lighter*  
(pg. 55)  
Auxiliary power point*  
(pg. 54)  
Climate control system  
(pg. 39)  
Auxiliary input  
jack*  
(pg. 32)  
* if equipped  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES  
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may  
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may  
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.  
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the  
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the  
respective system warning light for additional information.  
Service engine soon: The Service  
engine soon indicator light  
illuminates when the ignition is first  
turned to the ON position to check  
the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for  
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the ЉService engine soonЉ  
light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no  
malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the ЉService  
engine soonЉ light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not  
ready for I/M testing. See the Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance  
(I/M) testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.  
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board  
Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On  
board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications  
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could  
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid  
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced  
immediately by your authorized dealer.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust  
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel  
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components,  
possibly causing a fire.  
Check fuel cap: Illuminates when  
the fuel cap may not be properly  
installed. Check the fuel filler cap if  
this light remains on. Continued  
driving with this light on may cause  
the Service engine soon warning  
light to come on.  
It may take a long period of time for the system to detect an  
improperly installed or properly re-installed fuel filler cap  
depending on driving and fuel tank level conditions. Refer to Fuel  
filler cap in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.  
Brake system warning light: To  
confirm the brake system warning  
light is functional, it will  
momentarily illuminate when the  
ignition is turned to the ON position  
!
P
BRAKE  
when the engine is not running, or in a position between ON and START,  
or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the ON  
position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this  
time, seek service immediately from your authorized dealer. Illumination  
after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level or a  
failure to brake proportioning and the brake system should be inspected  
immediately by your authorized dealer.  
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning  
light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking  
performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the  
vehicle. Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer.  
Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can  
cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Anti-lock brake system: If the  
ABS light stays illuminated or  
continues to flash, a malfunction has  
been detected; have the system  
serviced immediately by your  
ABS  
authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake  
warning light also is illuminated.  
Airbag readiness: If this light fails  
to illuminate when the ignition is  
turned to ON, continues to flash or  
remains on, have the system  
serviced immediately by your  
authorized dealer. A chime will also sound when a malfunction in the  
supplemental restraint system has been detected.  
Seat belt: Reminds you to fasten  
your seat belt. A Belt-Minder  
chime will also sound to remind you  
to fasten your seat belt. Refer to the  
Seating and safety restraints  
chapter to activate/deactivate the Belt-Minderchime feature.  
Low tire pressure warning:  
Illuminates when your tire pressure  
is low. If the light remains on at  
start up or while driving, the tire  
pressure should be checked. Refer  
to Inflating Your Tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.  
When the ignition is first turned to ON, the light will illuminate for 3  
seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light does not turn ON,  
have the system inspected by your authorized dealer. For more  
information on this system, refer to Understanding Your Tire Pressure  
Monitoring System in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.  
Charging system: Illuminates when  
the battery is not charging properly.  
Engine oil pressure: Illuminates  
when the oil pressure falls below the  
normal range. Refer to Engine oil  
in the Maintenance and  
Specifications chapter.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Engine coolant temperature:  
Illuminates when the engine coolant  
temperature is high. Stop the  
vehicle as soon as possible , switch off the engine and let cool. Refer to  
Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.  
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the  
engine is running or hot.  
Foglamps: Illuminates when the  
foglamps are turned on. Refer to  
Foglamp control in the Lights  
chapter.  
Low fuel: Illuminates when the fuel  
level in the fuel tank is at or near  
empty. Rrefer to Fuel gauge in this  
chapter.  
Door ajar: Illuminates when the  
ignition is in the ON position and  
any door is open.  
Overdrive off (if equipped):  
O/D  
Illuminates when the overdrive  
function of the transmission has  
been turned off. Refer to the  
OFF  
Driving chapter. If the light flashes steadily or does not come on,  
have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, damage to the  
transmission could occur.  
Four wheel drive low (if  
4x4  
LOW  
equipped): Illuminates when  
four-wheel drive low is engaged.  
NOTE: If the light continues to  
flash have the system serviced.  
Four wheel drive high (if  
equipped): Illuminates when  
four-wheel drive high is engaged. It  
may also illuminate when the 4WD LOW is engaged. Refer to the  
Driving chapter for more information.  
4x4  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
NOTE: If the light continues to flash have the system serviced.  
Anti-theft system: Flashes when  
the SecuriLock™ Passive Anti-theft  
System has been activated.  
Speed control (if equipped):  
Illuminates when the speed control  
is engaged. Turns off when the  
speed control system is disengaged.  
Turn signal: Illuminates when the  
left or right turn signal or the  
hazard lights are turned on. If the  
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.  
High beams: Illuminates when the  
high beam headlamps are turned on.  
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the  
ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s door  
is opened.  
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking  
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the  
driver’s door is opened.  
Door ajar warning chime: Sounds when any door is opened (or not  
fully closed).  
Parking brake ON warning chime: Sounds when the parking brake is  
set, the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph  
(5 km/h).  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
GAUGES  
Speedometer: Indicates the  
current vehicle speed.  
Engine coolant temperature  
gauge: Indicates engine coolant  
temperature. At normal operating  
temperature, the needle will be in  
the normal range (between “H” and  
“C”). If it enters the red section,  
the engine is overheating. Stop  
the vehicle as soon as safely  
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.  
Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and specifications  
chapter.  
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap and/or the  
radiator cap while the engine is running or hot, this may result  
in serious burns.  
Odometer: Registers the total miles  
(kilometers) of the vehicle.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Trip odometer: Registers the miles  
(kilometers) of individual journeys.  
Press the button once until “TRIP”  
appears in the display (this  
represents the trip mode). To reset  
the trip, press and hold the control  
again for approximately 2 seconds,  
until the trip reading is 0.0 miles (kilometers). To toggle between trip  
and odometer, press and release the control.  
Tachometer: Indicates the engine  
speed in revolutions per minute.  
Driving with your tachometer  
pointer continuously at the top of  
the scale may damage the engine.  
Fuel gauge: Indicates  
approximately how much fuel is left  
in the fuel tank (when the ignition  
is in the ON position). The fuel  
gauge may vary slightly when the  
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.  
Proper gauge indication requires the  
ignition to be in the OFF or  
ACCESSORY position during refueling, otherwise correct fuel indication  
after refueling can be slow to update. Also, a minimum of 3 gallons  
(11 liters) is needed for correct indication after refueling.  
NOTE: The FUEL icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the  
fuel filler door is located.  
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications  
chapter for more information.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
AUDIO SYSTEMS  
AM/FM stereo (if equipped)  
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of  
vehicle control, accident and injury. Mazda strongly  
recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any  
device that may take their focus off the road. The drivers  
primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle.  
Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the  
driving task when it is safe to do so.  
Display preference: You can select Clock mode, which displays the  
time, or Frequency mode, which displays the current radio frequency, to  
appear in the radio display. Press CLK repeatedly to toggle between  
Clock and Frequency modes. If clock mode is selected and a radio  
function is pressed (i.e. SEEK, TUNE, Memory Presets), the radio  
information will display momentarily and then again display the time.  
1. AM/FM: Press to select  
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency bands.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
2. CLK —To set the time:  
Ensure that your audio system  
is turned off. Press and hold  
CLK until the hours flash in the  
display. Press  
Press and hold CLK again until the minutes flash. Press  
AUDIO to adjust the minutes.  
AUDIO  
to adjust the hours.  
To set the display mode: Press repeatedly to toggle between Clock  
mode and frequency mode.  
3. AUDIO: Press AUDIO  
repeatedly to toggle through the  
following modes and  
use  
/
to make adjustments in those modes.  
AUDIO to decrease/increase the bass setting.  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
Bass: Press  
Treble: Press  
to decrease/increase the treble setting.  
to adjust the audio between the left and  
Balance: Press  
right speakers.  
Hours: Press  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
to decrease/increase the hours.  
to decrease/increase the minutes.  
Minute: Press  
4. Tune: Press to manually go down/up (  
/
) the radio frequency  
and in audio mode to select various settings.  
5. Memory presets: To set a  
station: Select frequency band  
AM/FM; tune to a station, press  
and hold a preset button until sound returns. To tune a preset  
station, press the desired memory preset.  
6. SEEK: Press  
SEEK  
to  
access the previous or next  
radio station.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
7. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn  
the system ON/OFF. Turn to  
adjust the volume levels.  
If the volume is set above a  
certain level, and the ignition is  
turned off, the volume will come  
back to a “nominal” listening level when the ignition is turned back  
on.  
AM/FM stereo single CD/MP3 Satellite Compatible system  
(if equipped)  
1. CD eject: Press to eject the  
CD/MP3.  
2. CLK (Clock): Press CLK until  
SELECT HOUR or SELECT  
MINS is displayed. Press  
MENU  
to adjust the  
hours/minutes. Press CLK to display the time when the ignition is  
off.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
3. MUTE: Press to mute the  
playing media. Press again to  
return to the playing media.  
4. MENU: Press MENU repeatedly  
to scroll through the following  
modes and use  
/
to make  
an adjustment in those modes.  
SATELLITE RADIO MENU (if equipped): Press MENU when satellite  
radio mode is active to access. Press SEEK  
radio menu. Press  
CATEGORY: Press SEEK  
MENU to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel  
Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.) Press SEEK when the desired  
to enter into the satellite  
/
to cycle through the following options:  
to enter category mode. Press  
category appears in the display. After a category is selected, press  
SEEK to search for that specific category of channels only (i.e.  
ROCK). You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available  
SIRIUS categories and channels. Press SEEK  
to the main menu.  
to close and return  
SAVE SONG: Press SEEK  
to save the currently playing song in  
the system’s memory. (If you try to save something other than a song,  
CANT SAVE will appear in the display.) When the chosen song is  
playing on any satellite radio channel, the system will alert you with  
an audible prompt. Press SEEK  
while SONG ALERT is in the  
display and the system will take you to the channel playing the  
desired song. You can save up to 20 songs. If you attempt to save a  
song when the system is full, the display will read REPLACE SONG?  
Press SEEK  
to access the saved songs and press  
MENU  
to  
cycle through the saved songs. When the song appears in the display  
that you would like to replace, press SEEK  
will appear in the display.  
. SONG REPLACED  
DELETE SONG: Press SEEK  
to delete a song from the system’s  
to cycle through the saved songs. When  
memory. Press MENU  
the song appears in the display that you would like to delete, press  
SEEK  
. The song will appear in the display for confirmation. Press  
SEEK  
again and the display will read SONG DELETED. If you do  
not want to delete the currently listed song, press  
MENU  
to  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
select either RETURN or CANCEL.  
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO  
SONGS.  
DELETE ALL SONGS: Press SEEK  
to delete all song’s from the  
to confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will  
system’s memory. The display will read ARE YOU SURE ? Press  
SEEK  
read ALL DELETED.  
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO  
SONGS.  
ENABLE ALERTS / DISABLE ALERTS: Press SEEK  
to  
enable/disable the satellite alert status which alerts you when your  
selected songs are playing on a satellite radio channel. (The system  
default is disabled.) SONG ALERTS ENABLED/DISABLED will appear  
in the display. The menu listing will display the opposite state. For  
example, if you have chosen to enable the song alerts, the menu  
listing will read DISABLE as the alerts are currently on, so your other  
option is to turn them off.  
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio  
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.  
AUTOSET: Press  
MENU  
to set the strongest local radio stations  
for AM/FM1/FM2 without losing your original manually set preset  
stations.  
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1  
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system  
will store the last one in the remaining presets.  
BASS: Press  
MENU  
MENU  
MENU  
to decrease/increase the bass setting.  
to decrease/increase the treble setting.  
to adjust the audio between the left  
TREBLE: Press  
BALANCE: Press  
and right speakers.  
FADE: Press  
MENU  
to adjust the audio between the front and  
rear speakers.  
Next/previous directory: In MP3 mode, press  
the previous/next directory.  
MENU  
MENU  
to go to  
to select  
Flat file/directory mode: In MP3 mode, use  
flat file mode or directory mode.  
Normal / Track title/ File name: Use  
/
to scroll through MP3  
display options (track #, normal music name or file name).  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
5. TUNE: Press to manually go  
down/up (  
/
) the radio  
frequency and also to select  
various settings in menu mode.  
6. SHUFF (Shuffle): Press to  
play the current CD/MP3 tracks  
in random order. In MP3  
directory mode, press to play the tracks within the current directory  
in random order.  
7. REPEAT: Press to repeat the  
current CD/MP3 track. The  
selection will repeat  
continuously until deactivated. Press REPEAT again to deactivate.  
8. FF (Fast forward): Press to  
manually advance in a CD/MP3  
track.  
9. REW (Rewind): Press to  
REW  
1
manually reverse in a CD/MP3  
track.  
10. Memory presets: To set a  
station: Select frequency band  
AM/FM; tune to a station, press  
and hold a preset button until sound returns. To recall a previously  
set station, press the desired memory preset button briefly. You can  
save up to 18 stations, six in AM, six in FM1 and FM2.  
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), there are 18 available presets,  
six each for SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your  
memory presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a  
preset control until sound returns.  
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.  
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.  
11. SEEK/TRACK: Press to access  
the previous/next (  
/
)
strong station. In CD/MP3 mode,  
press to advance to the  
previous/next (  
/
) track.  
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press  
SEEK  
to seek to  
the previous/next channel.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
In CATEGORY MODE, press  
that category. Press SEEK  
SEEK  
to select a channel within  
to seek to the previous/next channel  
in the selected category. Press and hold  
through the previous /next channels.  
SEEK  
to fast seek  
In TEXT MODE, press  
SEEK  
to view the previous/additional  
display text.  
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.  
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.  
12. TEXT/SCAN:In radio and CD  
mode, press for a brief  
sampling of radio stations or CD  
tracks. Press again to stop.  
In MP3 mode, Press and release to view the next 12 characters in the  
MP3 music name/file name of the current MP3 track and directory.  
Press and hold to hear a brief sampling of MP3 tracks.  
In MP3 directory mode, press and hold to hear a brief sampling of all  
tracks in the current directory. Press and hold again to stop.  
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and release to view the  
Satellite text message.  
Press and hold to hear a brief sampling of the next channels. Press and  
hold again to stop.  
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.  
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.  
13. AM/FM: Press to select  
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.  
14. AUX: Press to access AUX  
modes.  
If equipped with Satellite  
Radio, press AUX to cycle through SAT1, SAT2 SAT3  
(Satellite Radio mode, if available) and LINE IN (Auxiliary  
audio mode, if equipped).  
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.  
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
15. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn  
ON/OFF. Turn to  
increase/decrease volume.  
If the volume is set above a  
certain level and the ignition is  
turned off, the volume will come  
back on at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is  
turned back on.  
16. CD: Press to enter CD/MP3  
mode. If a CD/MP3 is already  
present in the system, the disc  
will begin to play.  
17. CD slot: Insert a CD/MP3 label  
side up.  
Premium and Audiophile In-dash CD6/MP3 disc Satellite  
Compatible audio systems (if equipped)  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
1. AM/FM: Press to select  
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency bands.  
2. CD: Press to enter CD/MP3  
mode. If a CD/MP3 is already in  
the system, the disc will start  
playing.  
3. AUX: Press to access AUX  
modes. To return to radio mode,  
press AM/FM.  
If equipped with Satellite  
Radio, press AUX to cycle through SAT1, SAT2 SAT3  
(Satellite Radio mode, if available) and LINE IN (Auxiliary  
audio mode, if equipped).  
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.  
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.  
4. EJ (CD eject): To eject an  
individual CD/MP3, press the  
eject control and select the  
correct slot number by pressing the corresponding memory preset.  
Press and hold to eject all loaded CDs.  
5. CLK (Clock): Press CLK until  
SELECT HOUR or SELECT  
MINS is displayed. Press  
MENU  
to adjust the  
hours/minutes. Press CLK to display the time when the ignition is  
off.  
6. MUTE: Press to mute the  
playing media. Press again to  
return to the playing media.  
7. MENU: Press MENU repeatedly  
to toggle through the following  
modes and use  
/
to make  
adjustment in those modes.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
SATELLITE RADIO MENU (if  
equipped): Press MENU when  
satellite radio mode is active to  
access. Press SEEK  
to enter  
into the satellite radio menu. Press  
/
to cycle through the following  
options:  
CATEGORY: Press SEEK  
to enter category mode. Press  
to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel  
MENU  
Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.) Press SEEK  
when the desired  
category appears in the display. After a category is selected, press  
SEEK to search for that specific category of channels only (i.e.  
ROCK). You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available  
SIRIUS categories and channels. Press SEEK  
to the main menu.  
to close and return  
SAVE SONG: Press SEEK  
to save the currently playing song in  
the system’s memory. (If you try to save something other than a song,  
CANT SAVE will appear in the display.) When the chosen song is  
playing on any satellite radio channel, the system will alert you with  
an audible prompt. Press SEEK  
while SONG ALERT is in the  
display and the system will take you to the channel playing the  
desired song. You can save up to 20 songs. If you attempt to save a  
song when the system is full, the display will read REPLACE SONG?  
Press SEEK  
to access the saved songs and press  
MENU  
to  
cycle through the saved songs. When the song appears in the display  
that you would like to replace, press SEEK  
will appear in the display.  
. SONG REPLACED  
DELETE SONG: Press SEEK  
to delete a song from the system’s  
to cycle through the saved songs. When  
memory. Press MENU  
the song appears in the display that you would like to delete, press  
SEEK  
. The song will appear in the display for confirmation. Press  
SEEK  
again and the display will read SONG DELETED. If you do  
not want to delete the currently listed song, press  
select either RETURN or CANCEL.  
MENU  
to  
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO  
SONGS.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
DELETE ALL SONGS: Press SEEK  
to delete all song’s from the  
system’s memory. The display will read ARE YOU SURE ? Press  
SEEK  
to confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will  
read ALL DELETED.  
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO  
SONGS.  
ENABLE ALERTS / DISABLE ALERTS: Press SEEK  
to  
enable/disable the satellite alert status which alerts you when your  
selected songs are playing on a satellite radio channel. (The system  
default is disabled.) SONG ALERTS ENABLED/DISABLED will appear  
in the display. The menu listing will display the opposite state. For  
example, if you have chosen to enable the song alerts, the menu  
listing will read DISABLE as the alerts are currently on, so your other  
option is to turn them off.  
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio  
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.  
AUTOSET: Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without  
losing your original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2 . Press  
MENU to access. Use  
MENU  
to set.  
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1  
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system  
will store the last one in the remaining presets.  
BASS: Press  
MENU  
MENU  
MENU  
to decrease/increase the bass setting.  
TREBLE: Press  
to decrease/increase the treble setting.  
BALANCE: Press  
right speakers.  
to adjust the audio between the left and  
to adjust the audio between the front and  
FADE: Press  
MENU  
rear speakers.  
Next/previous directory: In MP3 mode, press MENU  
/
to go to  
the previous/next directory.  
Flat file/directory mode: In MP3 mode, press MENU to access this  
feature. Use MENU to select flat file mode or directory mode.  
Track #/ normal music name/file name: Press MENU to access and  
use to scroll through MP3 display options (track #, normal music  
name or file name).  
/
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
8. TUNE/DISC:In radio mode,  
press to manually go down/up  
(
/
) the radio frequency,  
or to access another CD/MP3.  
Also use in menu mode to select various settings.  
9. SHUFF (Shuffle): Press to  
play the tracks on the current  
CD/MP3 in random order. In  
MP3 directory mode, press to play the tracks within the current  
directory in random order.  
10. COMP (Compression): In  
CD/MP3 modes, press to bring  
loud and soft passages together  
for a more consistent listening level.  
11. REPEAT: Press to repeat the  
current CD/MP3 track. The  
selection will repeat  
continuously until deactivated. Press REPEAT again to deactivate.  
12. FF (Fast forward): Press to  
manually advance in a CD/MP3  
track.  
13. REW (Rewind): Press to  
REW  
1
manually reverse in a CD/MP3  
track.  
14. Memory presets: To set a  
station: Select frequency band  
AM/FM; tune to a station, press  
REW  
1
FF  
2
REPEAT  
3
COMP  
4
SHUFF  
5
6
and hold a preset button until sound returns. To select a preset  
station, press the desired memory preset. You can save up to 18  
stations, six in AM, six in FM1 and FM2.  
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), there are 18 available presets,  
six each for SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your  
memory presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a  
preset control until sound returns.  
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.  
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
15. SEEK/TRACK:In radio, CD  
and MP3 flat file mode,  
press  
/
to access the  
previous/next strong station or  
track. In MP3 directory mode, press to select the next/previous track  
in the current directory.  
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press  
SEEK  
to seek to  
the previous/next channel.  
In CATEGORY MODE, press  
that category. Press and hold  
previous /next channels.  
SEEK  
SEEK  
to select a channel within  
to fast seek through the  
In TEXT MODE, press  
SEEK  
to view the previous/additional  
display text.  
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.  
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.  
16. TEXT/SCAN: In radio and  
CD mode, press for a brief  
sampling of radio stations or CD  
tracks. Press and hold again to  
stop.  
In MP3 mode, Press and release to view the next 12 characters in the  
MP3 music name/file name of the current MP3 track and directory.  
Press and hold to hear a brief sampling of MP3 tracks.  
In MP3 directory mode, press and hold to hear a brief sampling of all  
tracks in the current directory. Press again to stop.  
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and release to view the  
Satellite text message.  
Press and hold to hear a brief sampling of the next channels. Press and  
hold again to stop.  
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.  
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.  
17. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn  
ON/OFF. Turn to  
increase/decrease volume.  
If the volume is set above a  
certain level and the ignition is  
turned off, the volume will come  
back on at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is  
turned back on.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
18. LOAD: Press to load a CD/MP3.  
To load a CD/MP3 disc to a  
specific slot, press LOAD and  
select the slot number by pressing the memory preset buttons. Press  
and hold LOAD to autoload up to six discs.  
19. CD slot: Insert a CD/MP3, label  
side up.  
Auxiliary input jack (Line in)  
Your vehicle may be equipped with  
an Auxiliary Input Jack (AIJ). The  
Auxiliary Input Jack provides a way  
to connect your portable music  
player to the in-vehicle audio  
system. This allows the audio from a  
portable music player to be played  
through the vehicle speakers with  
high fidelity. To achieve optimal  
performance, please observe the  
following instructions when  
attaching your portable music device to the audio system.  
Required equipment:  
1. Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones  
2. An audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm)  
connectors at each end  
To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack:  
1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off.  
2. Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully  
charged and that the device is turned off.  
3. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone  
output of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable  
to the AIJ in your vehicle.  
4. Turn the radio on, using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded  
into the system. Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level.  
5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the  
volume.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
6. Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE IN appears in  
the display.  
You should hear audio from your portable music player although it  
may be low.  
7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the  
level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between  
the AUX and FM or CD controls.  
Troubleshooting:  
1. Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. Line level  
outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not  
compatible with the AIJ. The AIJ will only work correctly with  
devices that have a headphone output with a volume control.  
2. Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is  
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio  
system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality.  
Many portable music players have different output levels, so not all  
players should be set at the same levels. Some players will sound  
best at full volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume.  
3. If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the  
portable music player volume down. If the problems persists, replace  
or recharge the batteries in the portable music player.  
4. The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner  
when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control  
(play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.  
5. For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your  
portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is  
moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure  
location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the  
vehicle is in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough  
to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while the  
vehicle is in motion.  
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION  
Radio frequencies:  
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications  
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:  
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz  
FM: 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
Radio reception factors:  
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:  
Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the  
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.  
Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,  
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.  
Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal  
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency  
is displayed.  
CD/CD player care  
Do:  
Handle discs by their edges only.  
(Never touch the playing  
surface).  
Inspect discs before playing.  
Clean only with an approved CD  
cleaner.  
Wipe discs from the center out.  
Don’t:  
Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods  
of time.  
Clean using a circular motion.  
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in  
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical  
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact  
discs may not function correctly when used in Mazda CD players.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
Do not use any irregular shaped  
CDs or discs with a scratch  
protection film attached.  
CDs with homemade paper  
(adhesive) labels should not be  
inserted into the CD player as  
the label may peel and cause the  
CD to become jammed. It is  
recommended that homemade  
CDs be identified with  
permanent felt tip marker rather  
than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please  
contact your authorized dealer for further information.  
Audio system warranty and service  
Refer to the Warranty Information Booklet for audio system warranty  
information. If service is necessary, see your authorized Mazda  
dealership.  
Satellite radio information (if equipped)  
Satellite radio channels: SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music, news,  
sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For  
more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels,  
visit www.sirius.com in the United States, www.sirius-canada.ca in  
Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1–888–539–7474.  
Satellite radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your  
vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the  
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an  
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio  
system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite  
radio reception performance:  
Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the  
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other  
material as far away from the antenna as possible.  
Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway  
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can  
interfere with your reception.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
Station overload: When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating  
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an  
audio mute.  
Unlike AM/FM audible static, you will hear an audio mute when there is  
a satellite radio signal interference. Your radio display may display NO  
SIGNAL to indicate the interference.  
SIRIUS satellite radio service: SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription  
based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and  
entertainment programming. A service fee is required in order to receive  
SIRIUS service. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed  
SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include:  
Hardware and limited subscription term, which begins on the date of  
sale or lease of the vehicle.  
Online media player providing access to all 65 SIRIUS music channels  
over the internet (U.S. customers only).  
For information on extended subscription terms, contact SIRIUS at  
1–888–539–7474.  
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add  
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular  
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you.  
Mazda Motor Corporation shall not be responsible for any such  
programming changes.  
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN): This 12–digit  
Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate, modify or track your  
satellite radio account. You will need this number when communicating  
with SIRIUS. While in Satellite Radio mode, you can view this number on  
the radio display by pressing AUX and Preset 1 control simultaneously.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
Radio Display  
ACQUIRING  
Condition  
Action Required  
No action required.  
This message should  
disappear shortly.  
Radio requires more  
than two seconds to  
produce audio for the  
selected channel.  
Internal module or  
system failure  
SAT FAULT  
If this message does  
not clear within a short  
period of time, or with  
an ignition key cycle,  
your receiver may have  
a fault. See your  
present.  
authorized dealer for  
service.  
INVALID CHNL  
Channel no longer  
available.  
This previously  
available channel is no  
longer available. Tune  
to another channel. If  
the channel was one of  
your presets, you may  
choose another channel  
for that preset button.  
Contact SIRIUS at  
1–888–539–7474 to  
subscribe to the  
UNSUBSCRIBED  
NO TEXT  
Subscription not  
available for this  
channel.  
channel or tune to  
another channel.  
Artist information not Artist information not  
available.  
available at this time on  
this channel. The  
system is working  
properly.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
Radio Display  
NO TEXT  
Condition  
Action Required  
Song title information Song title information  
not available.  
not available at this  
time on this channel.  
The system is working  
properly.  
NO TEXT  
Category information  
not available.  
Category information  
not available at this  
time on this channel.  
The system is working  
properly.  
NO SIGNAL  
Loss of signal from  
the SIRIUS satellite or  
SIRIUS tower to the  
vehicle antenna.  
You are in a location  
that is blocking the  
SIRIUS signal (i.e.,  
tunnel, under an  
overpass, dense foliage,  
etc). The system is  
working properly. When  
you move into an open  
area, the signal should  
return.  
UPDATING  
Update of channel  
programming in  
progress.  
No action required. The  
process may take up to  
three minutes.  
CALL SIRIUS  
1–888–539–7474  
Satellite service has  
been deactivated by  
SIRIUS Satellite  
Radio.  
Call SIRIUS at  
1–888–539–7474 to  
re-activate or resolve  
subscription issues.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate Controls  
HEATER ONLY SYSTEM  
(IF EQUIPPED)  
1. Fan speed adjustment:  
Controls the volume of air  
circulated in the vehicle.  
2. Temperature selection:  
Controls the temperature of the  
airflow in the vehicle.  
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the  
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.  
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.  
OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.  
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the  
floor vents.  
: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.  
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and  
floor vents.  
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents.  
Operating tips  
To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place  
the air flow selector in the  
position.  
To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle during cold or warm  
weather, do not drive with the air flow selector in the OFF position.  
Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the air flow selector in  
OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle to “breathe”  
using the outside air inlet vents.  
Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the air  
flow to the back seats.  
Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of  
the windshield.  
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:  
1. Select  
.
2. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.  
3. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate Controls  
4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.  
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents  
located in the middle of the instrument panel.  
WARNING: Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel  
as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden  
stop.  
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM  
(IF EQUIPPED)  
1. Fan speed adjustment:  
Controls the volume of air  
circulated in the vehicle.  
2. Temperature selection:  
Controls the temperature of the  
airflow in the vehicle.  
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the  
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.  
MAX A/C: Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the  
instrument panel vents only. Temperature of airflow not adjustable.  
A/C: Uses outside air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the instrument  
panel vents only.  
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.  
OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.  
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the  
floor vents.  
: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.  
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and  
floor vents.  
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents.  
Operating tips  
To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place  
the air flow selector in the  
position.  
To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the  
air flow selector in the OFF position.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate Controls  
Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the air flow selector in  
MAX A/C or OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle  
to “breathe” using the outside air inlet vents.  
Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the  
airflow to the back seats.  
Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of  
the windshield.  
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:  
1. Select  
.
2. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.  
3. Set the highest fan speed.  
4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.  
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents  
located in the middle of the instrument panel.  
WARNING: Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel  
as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden  
stop.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
HEADLAMP CONTROL  
Turns the lamps off.  
Turns on the parking lamps,  
instrument panel lamps, license  
plate lamps and tail lamps.  
Turns the headlamps on.  
Foglamp control (if equipped)  
The foglamps can be turned on  
when the headlamp control is in  
the  
or  
position and the  
high beams are not turned on.  
Pull headlamp control towards you  
to turn foglamps on. The foglamp  
indicator light  
on the headlamp  
control and in the instrument  
cluster will illuminate.  
High beams  
After turning the headlamps on,  
push the lever toward the  
instrument panel to activate. Pull  
the lever towards you to deactivate.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
Flash to pass  
Pull toward you slightly to activate  
and release to deactivate.  
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)  
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output.  
To activate:  
the ignition must be in the ON position and  
the headlamp control is in the OFF or parking lamp.  
WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at  
dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp  
(DRL) (if equipped) system does not activate the parking lights  
or side marker lights and generally may not provide adequate  
lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your  
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.  
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL  
Use to adjust the brightness of the  
instrument panel and all applicable  
switches in the vehicle during  
headlamp and parklamp operation.  
Move the control up or down to  
adjust the intensity of the panel  
lighting.  
Move the control to the full upright  
position, past detent, to turn on the  
interior lamps.  
Note: If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is  
installed, the dimmer switch requires re-calibration. Rotate the dimmer  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
switch from the full dim position to the full Dome/ON position to reset.  
This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting  
conditions.  
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS  
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed before leaving the  
assembly plant. If your vehicle is involved in an accident or if you have  
problems fixing the alignment of your headlamps, have them checked by  
a qualified service technician.  
Headlamp aim adjustment  
The headlamps are designed to be mechanically aimed, but can also be  
aimed visually by doing the following:  
1. Park your vehicle on a level surface about 25 feet (7.6 meters) away  
from a vertical plain surface (3). Check your headlamp alignment at  
night or in a dark area so that you can see the headlamp beam  
pattern.  
(1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)  
(2) Center height of lamp to  
ground  
(3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)  
(4) Horizontal reference line  
(5) Center of headlamps  
(6) Center line of the vehicle  
2. The center of the headlamp is  
marked either on the lens (a  
circle or cross marker) or on the bulb shield, internal to the lamp  
(mark or feature). Measure the height from the center of your  
headlamp to the ground (2) and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter) long  
horizontal line on the wall or screen (1) at this height (masking tape  
works well).  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
3. Turn on the low beam  
headlamps and open the hood.  
4. Locate the high intensity area of  
the beam pattern and place the  
top edge of the intensity zone  
even with the horizontal  
reference line (4). If the top  
edge of the high intensity area  
is not even with the horizontal  
line, follow the next step to  
adjust it.  
5. Locate the vertical adjuster for  
each headlamp. Adjust the aim  
by using a 4 mm wrench to turn  
the adjuster control either  
clockwise (to adjust down) or  
counterclockwise (to adjust up).  
6. In addition to the horizontal line  
marked in step 2, a pair of  
vertical lines (5) must be  
marked at the center line of the  
headlamps on the wall or  
screen.  
7. On the wall or screen, locate the high intensity area of the beam  
pattern. The left edge of the high intensity area should be even with  
the vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under adjustment. If  
the left edge of the high intensity area is not even with the vertical  
line, follow the next step to adjust it.  
8. Locate the horizontal adjuster  
for each headlamp. Use a 4 mm  
wrench, turning it clockwise or  
counterclockwise, to place the  
left edge of the high intensity  
area even with the vertical line  
corresponding to the headlamp  
under adjustment.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL  
Push down to activate the left  
turn signal.  
Push up to activate the right turn  
signal.  
INTERIOR LAMPS  
Courtesy/reading lamps (if equipped)  
The courtesy lamp lights when:  
any door is opened.  
the instrument panel dimmer  
switch is held up until the  
courtesy lamps come on.  
the remote entry controls are  
pressed and the ignition is OFF.  
BULB REPLACEMENT  
Headlamp Condensation  
The headlamps are vented to equalize pressure. When moist air enters  
the headlamp(s) through the vents, there is a possibility that  
condensation can occur. This condensation is normal and will clear  
within 45 minutes of headlamp operation.  
Using the right bulbs  
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs  
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an  
“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern  
and safe visibility.  
NOTE: The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the  
lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
Function  
Number of  
Trade number  
bulbs  
Park/turn/side marker lamps (front)  
Headlamps  
Fog lamps (if equipped)  
Hi-mount brake lamp  
Rear stop/tail lamps  
Rear turn lamps  
Rear license plate lamps  
Backup lamps  
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
3157 A (amber)  
9007  
9006  
922  
4157K or 3157K  
3156  
194  
3155  
912  
904  
904  
Dome lamp  
Map/dome-SuperCab (if equipped)  
Map/dome-Regular Cab (if equipped)  
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.  
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer.  
Replacing the interior bulbs  
Check the operation of the following interior bulbs frequently:  
Courtesy/Reading lamp  
For bulb replacement, see an authorized Mazda dealer.  
Replacing exterior bulbs  
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.  
Replacing headlamp bulbs  
NOTE: The procedure can be difficult. Your Mazda dealer has the proper  
tools, training and parts to perform this task. If you have difficulty with  
this, visit your local Mazda dealer.  
WARNING: Handling Halogen Bulbs: When a halogen bulb  
breaks, it is dangerous. These bulbs contain pressurized gas. If  
one is broken, it will explode and serious injuries could be  
caused by the flying glass. If the glass portion of the bulb is  
touched with bare hands, body oil could cause the bulb to  
overheat and explode when lit. Never touch the glass portion of  
the bulb with your bare hands and always wear eye protection  
when handling or working around halogen bulbs.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
WARNING: Children and Halogen Bulbs: Playing with a halogen  
bulb is dangerous. Serious injuries could be caused by dropping  
a halogen bulb or breaking in some other way. Always keep  
halogen bulbs out of the reach of children.  
To remove the headlamp bulb:  
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in OFF position, then open the hood.  
2. Reach behind the lamp assembly for access and disconnect the  
electrical connector.  
3. Locate the bulb retaining ring  
behind the headlamp assembly.  
4. Remove the bulb retaining ring  
by turning it counterclockwise  
and remove the old bulb by  
gently pulling it straight back  
out of the lamp assembly. Keep  
the retaining ring to retain the  
new bulb.  
To install the new bulb:  
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of  
children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do  
not touch the glass. The oil from your hands could cause the bulb  
to break the next time the headlamps are operated. Always wear  
safety glasses while handling bulbs.  
NOTE: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with  
rubbing alcohol before being used.  
1. With the flat side of the bulb’s plastic base facing upward, insert the  
glass end of the bulb into the lamp assembly. You may need to turn  
the bulb left or right to align the grooves in the plastic base with the  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
tabs in the lamp assembly. When the grooves are aligned, push the  
bulb into the lamp assembly until the plastic base contacts the rear  
of the lamp assembly.  
2. Install the bulb retaining ring over the plastic base until it contacts  
the rear of the socket by rotating clockwise until you feel a “stop.”  
3. Install the electrical connector into the plastic base until it snaps,  
locking it into position.  
4. Turn the headlamps on and make sure they work properly. If the  
headlamp was correctly aligned before you changed the bulb, you  
should not need to align it again.  
Replacing front park/turn side marker bulbs  
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in  
OFF position, then open the  
hood.  
2. Remove the screw from lamp  
assembly.  
3. Disengage lamp assembly by  
pulling it straight forward. It has  
a snap fit.  
4. Rotate bulb socket  
counterclockwise and remove  
from lamp assembly.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
5. Carefully pull bulb straight out  
of socket and push in the new  
bulb.  
6. Install the bulb socket in lamp  
assembly by turning clockwise.  
7. Align the lamp on the vehicle  
and push to snap in place.  
8. Install the screw on lamp assembly.  
Replacing stop lamp/tail lamp/sidemarker lamp/turn lamp/backup  
lamp bulbs  
These bulbs are located in the same  
portion of the tail lamp assembly,  
one just below the other. Follow the  
same steps to replace either bulb:  
1. Open the tailgate to expose the  
lamp assemblies.  
2. Remove the four screws and the  
lamp assembly from vehicle.  
3. Rotate the bulb socket  
counterclockwise and remove  
from lamp assembly.  
4. Carefully pull the bulb straight  
out of the socket and push in  
the new bulb.  
5. Install the bulb socket in lamp  
assembly by turning clockwise.  
6. Install the lamp assembly and  
secure with four screws.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
Replacing fog lamp bulbs  
WARNING: Handling Halogen Bulbs: When a halogen bulb  
breaks, it is dangerous. These bulbs contain pressurized gas. If  
one is broken, it will explode and serious injuries could be  
caused by the flying glass. If the glass portion of the bulb is  
touched with bare hands, body oil could cause the bulb to  
overheat and explode when lit. Never touch the glass portion of  
the bulb with your bare hands and always wear eye protection  
when handling or working around halogen bulbs.  
WARNING: Children and Halogen Bulbs: Playing with a halogen  
bulb is dangerous. Serious injuries could be caused by dropping  
a halogen bulb or breaking in some other way. Always keep  
halogen bulbs out of the reach of children.  
NOTE: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with  
rubbing alcohol before being used.  
1. Remove the bulb socket from  
the fog lamp by turning  
counterclockwise.  
2. Disconnect the electrical  
connector from the fog lamp  
bulb.  
3. Connect the electrical connector to the new fog lamp bulb.  
4. Install the bulb socket in the fog lamp turning clockwise.  
Replacing high-mount brake lamp  
To remove the brake lamp assembly:  
1. Remove the two screws and  
lamp assembly from vehicle.  
2. Remove the bulb socket from  
lamp assembly by rotating it counterclockwise.  
3. Carefully pull bulb straight out of socket and push in the new bulb.  
To install the brake lamp assembly:  
1. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly by rotating clockwise.  
2. Install the lamp assembly on the vehicle and secure with two screws.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs  
The license plate bulbs are located  
behind the rear bumper. To change  
the license plate lamp bulbs:  
1. Reach behind the rear bumper  
to locate the bulb socket.  
2. Twist the socket  
counterclockwise and remove.  
3. Pull out the old bulb from  
socket and push in the new  
bulb.  
4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER  
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end  
of the control away from you to  
increase the speed of the wipers  
(from desired interval to low or high  
speed position); rotate towards you  
to decrease the speed of the wipers.  
Windshield washer: Push the end  
of the stalk:  
briefly: causes a single swipe of  
the wipers without washer fluid.  
a quick push and hold: the wipers  
will swipe several times with  
washer fluid.  
a long push and hold: the wipers  
and washer fluid will be activated  
for up to ten seconds.  
Courtesy wipe feature: One extra wipe will happen a few seconds  
after washing the front window to clear any water that is dripping down  
from the top of the windshield caused by the washing.  
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.  
This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid  
level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.  
This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper  
motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,  
always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper  
blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
TILT STEERING WHEEL (IF EQUIPPED)  
To adjust the steering wheel:  
1. Pull and hold the steering wheel  
release control toward you.  
2. Move the steering wheel up or  
down until you find the desired  
location.  
3. Release the steering wheel  
release control. This will lock  
the steering wheel in position.  
WARNING: Adjusting the steering wheel while the vehicle is  
moving is dangerous. Moving it can very easily cause the driver  
to abruptly turn to the left or right. This can lead to loss of  
control or an accident. Never adjust the steering wheel while  
the vehicle is moving.  
CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)  
Your vehicle may be equipped with a  
variety of console features. These  
include:  
Utility compartment with  
cassette/compact disc storage  
Cupholders  
Flip up armrest  
WARNING: Use only soft cups  
in the cupholder. Hard objects  
can injure you in a collision.  
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)  
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert  
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the  
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or  
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power  
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
The auxiliary power points are  
located on the instrument panel.  
Do not use the power point for  
operating the cigarette lighter  
element (if equipped).  
To prevent the fuse from being  
blown, do not use the power  
point(s) over the vehicle capacity of  
12 VDC/180W. If the power point or cigar lighter socket is not working, a  
fuse may have blown. Refer to Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel  
and Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for fuse  
ratings and information on checking and replacing fuses.  
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power  
point longer than necessary when the engine is not running.  
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.  
Cigar/Cigarette lighter (if equipped)  
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter  
socket.  
Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating, this will  
damage the lighter element and socket. The lighter will be released from  
its heating position when it is ready to be used.  
Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your  
warranty.  
POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)  
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and  
do not let children play with the power windows. They may  
seriously injure themselves.  
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify  
they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or  
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Press and pull the window switches  
to open and close windows.  
Push down (to the first detent)  
and hold the switch to open.  
Pull up and hold the switch to  
close.  
One touch down  
Allows the driver’s window to open  
fully without holding the control  
down. Push the switch completely  
down to the second detent and  
release quickly. The window will  
open fully. Momentarily press the  
switch to any position to stop the  
window operation.  
INTERIOR MIRROR  
The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm  
which lets you adjust the mirror UP or DOWN and from SIDE to SIDE.  
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in  
motion.  
EXTERIOR MIRRORS  
Power mirror control (if equipped)  
To adjust your mirrors:  
1. Rotate the control clockwise to  
adjust the right mirror and  
rotate the control  
counterclockwise to adjust the  
left mirror.  
2. Move the control in the  
direction you wish to tilt the  
mirror.  
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Fold-away mirrors  
Pull the side mirrors in carefully  
when driving through a narrow  
space, like an automatic car wash.  
SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)  
With speed control set, you can maintain a set speed without keeping  
your foot on the accelerator pedal.  
WARNING: Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on  
roads that are winding, slippery, or unpaved. You may lose  
control of the vehicle.  
WARNING: Do not shift the gearshift lever into N (Neutral)  
with the speed control on. You may lose control of the vehicle  
or cause engine system damage.  
Setting speed control  
The controls for using your speed  
control are located on the steering  
wheel for your convenience.  
1. Press the ON control and  
release it.  
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.  
3. Press the SET + control and  
release it.  
4. Take your foot off the  
accelerator pedal.  
5. The indicator light  
instrument cluster will turn on.  
Note:  
on the  
Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a  
steep hill.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you  
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.  
If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below  
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.  
Disengaging speed control  
To disengage the speed control:  
Depress the brake pedal or  
Depress the clutch pedal (if equipped).  
Disengaging the speed control will not erase previous set speed.  
Note: When you use the clutch pedal to disengage the speed control,  
the engine speed may briefly increase, this is normal.  
Resuming a set speed  
Press the RES (resume) control and  
release it. This will automatically  
return the vehicle to the previously  
set speed.  
Increasing speed while using speed control  
There are three ways to set a higher  
speed:  
Press and hold the SET + control  
until you get to the desired  
speed, then release the control.  
Press and release the SET +  
control to operate the Tap-Up function. Each tap will increase the set  
speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).  
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the  
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET + control.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Reducing speed while using speed control  
There are three ways to reduce a  
set speed:  
Press and hold the CST - control  
until you get to the desired  
speed, then release the control.  
Press and release the CST -  
control to operate the Tap-Down  
function. Each tap will decrease the set speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).  
Depress the brake pedal or the  
clutch pedal (if equipped) until  
the desired vehicle speed is  
reached, press the SET + control.  
Turning off speed control  
There are three ways to turn off the speed control:  
Depress the brake pedal or the clutch pedal (if equipped). This will  
not erase your vehicle’s previously set speed.  
Press the speed control OFF  
control.  
Turn OFF the ignition.  
Note: When you turn off the speed  
control or the ignition, your speed  
control set speed memory is erased.  
Note: Fully depressing the clutch  
pedal may cause a flare in engine RPM as the throttle is returned to idle.  
This is normal.  
OVERDRIVE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)  
Activating overdrive  
(Overdrive) is the normal drive position for the best fuel economy.  
The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through  
all available gears.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Deactivating overdrive  
Press the Transmission Control  
Switch (TCS) located on the end of  
the gearshift lever. The O/D Off  
O/D  
ON/OFF  
indicator light will illuminate on the  
instrument cluster. The transmission  
will operate in all gears except overdrive.  
To return to normal overdrive mode, press the Transmission Control  
Switch again. The O/D Off indicator light will no longer be illuminated.  
When you shut off and re-start your vehicle, the transmission will  
automatically return to normal  
(Overdrive) mode.  
For additional information about the gearshift lever and the transmission  
control switch operation refer to the Automatic Transmission  
Operation section of the Driving chapter.  
BED EXTENDER (IF EQUIPPED)  
Your vehicle may be equipped with a bed extender designed to extend  
the pickup box for larger loads.  
To extend the bed extender:  
1. Lower tailgate.  
2. Pull the lever on each side of  
the bed extender to release it  
from the pickup box.  
3. Lift the bed extender over onto  
the tailgate.  
4. Evenly push down on the bed  
extender and push the lever in  
on each side locking it in place.  
To stow the bed extender, follow  
steps one through four in reverse  
order.  
The bed extender may be used to  
secure a load of up to 100 lb.  
(46 kg) on the tailgate.  
The bed extender should always  
be kept in the stowed position with the tailgate closed when not  
in use.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Activating bed extender Theft  
Deterrent Device:  
The following procedure can be  
done with the bed extender in the  
stowed or extended position.  
1. Locate the Phillips head screw  
in the middle of the vertical  
brace in front of the locking  
clip.  
2. Turn the screw  
counterclockwise until you hear an audible click.  
3. To deactivate, turn the screw clockwise until the locking clip moves  
freely.  
To remove the bed extender:  
1. Extend the bed extender.  
2. Pull the lever on each side of  
the bed extender to unlock it.  
Make sure the locking clip screws  
are loose before removing the bed  
extender.  
3. Press the locking clips below  
the middle bar and lift the bed  
extender out of the channels on  
the “D” pillar.  
To install the bed extender, follow the removal procedure in reverse  
order.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
KEYS  
The key operates all locks on your vehicle. You should always carry a  
second key with you in a safe place in case you require it in an  
emergency.  
If your vehicle is equipped with the SecuriLock™ Passive Anti-theft  
system, your keys are coded to your vehicle; using a non-coded key will  
not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose your dealer supplied keys,  
replacement keys are available through your authorized dealer.  
POWER DOOR LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED)  
Press the control to unlock or lock  
all the doors.  
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of  
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device  
must accept any interference received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party  
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to  
operate the equipment.  
The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is  
approximately 33 feet (10 meters). A decrease in operating range could  
be caused by:  
weather conditions,  
nearby radio towers,  
structures around the vehicle, or  
other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
Your vehicle is equipped with a remote entry system which allows you to:  
unlock the vehicle doors without  
a key.  
lock all the vehicle doors without  
a key.  
activate the personal alarm.  
If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take  
ALL remote entry transmitters with you to your authorized dealer in  
order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.  
Unlocking the doors  
1. Press  
and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior  
lamps will illuminate.  
2. Press  
doors.  
and release again within three seconds to unlock all the  
Locking the doors  
Press and release to lock all the doors. The park lamps will flash  
once to confirm lock; if any of the doors are not properly closed, the  
lamps will not flash.  
is pressed a second time within three seconds, the lamps will  
If  
flash again and the horn will chirp to confirm all doors are locked and  
closed. If either door is ajar the lamps will not flash and the horn will  
chirp twice.  
Car finder  
Press  
twice within 3 seconds. The horn will chirp and the turn lamps  
will flash. It is recommended that this method be used to locate your  
vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.  
Sounding a panic alarm  
Press  
to activate the alarm. The horn will sound and the parklamps  
will flash for approximately 3 minutes. Press again or turn the ignition to  
the 4 (ON) position to deactivate, or wait for the alarm to timeout in 3  
minutes.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the 2  
(LOCK) or 3 (OFF) position.  
Replacing the battery  
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium  
battery CR2032 or equivalent.  
To replace the battery:  
1. Twist a thin coin between the  
two halves of the remote entry  
transmitter near the key ring.  
DO NOT TAKE THE RUBBER  
COVER AND CIRCUIT BOARD  
OFF THE FRONT HOUSING OF  
THE REMOTE ENTRY  
TRANSMITTER.  
2. Do not wipe off any grease on  
the battery terminals on the  
back surface of the circuit  
board.  
3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when  
disposing of transmitter batteries.  
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry  
transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the  
battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery  
housing cavity.  
5. Snap the two halves back together.  
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter  
to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter  
should operate normally after battery replacement.  
Replacing lost remote entry transmitters  
If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed  
because you lost one, or would like to buy additional remote entry  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
transmitters, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all  
remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for  
reprogramming.  
How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters  
You must have all remote entry transmitters (maximum of four)  
available before beginning this procedure.  
Note: Ensure the brake pedal is not  
depressed during this sequence.  
4
To reprogram the remote entry  
transmitters:  
3
1
5
1. Ensure the vehicle is  
electronically unlocked.  
2
2. Put the key in the ignition.  
3. Turn the key from the 2  
(LOCK) position to 3 (OFF).  
4. Cycle eight times rapidly (within 10 seconds) between the 3 (OFF)  
position and 4 (ON). Note: The eighth turn must end in the 4 (ON)  
position.  
5. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming  
mode has been activated.  
6. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter.  
Note: If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start  
the procedure over again.  
7. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that this remote entry  
transmitter has been programmed.  
8. Repeat Step 6 to program each additional remote entry transmitter.  
9. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position after you have finished  
programming all of the remote entry transmitters. Note: After 20  
seconds, you will automatically exit the programming mode.  
10. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming  
mode has been exited.  
Illuminated entry  
The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to  
unlock the door(s) or sound the personal alarm.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:  
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, or  
the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or  
after 25 seconds of illumination.  
The inside lights will not turn off if:  
they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or  
any door is open.  
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps after several minutes if  
they are left on accidentally.  
SECURILOCK™ PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)  
SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization  
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being  
started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The  
use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.  
Your vehicle comes with two coded keys; additional coded keys may be  
purchased from your authorized dealer. The authorized dealer can  
program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys  
yourself. Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to  
program the coded key.  
Note: The SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system is not compatible with  
non-Mazda aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may  
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.  
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to  
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same  
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these  
objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These  
objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a  
momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the  
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on  
the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine.  
Anti-theft indicator  
The anti-theft indicator is located in  
the instrument cluster.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
Vehicles equipped with the SecuriLock™ Passive Anti-theft system  
behave as follows:  
When the ignition is in the 1(OFF/LOCK) position, the indicator will  
flash once every 2 seconds for a total of 10 seconds to indicate the  
SecuriLock™ system is functioning as a theft deterrent.  
When the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position, the indicator will glow for  
3 seconds to indicate a programmed key has been validated and the  
SecuriLock™ Passive Anti-theft system has enabled the engine.  
Vehicles without the SecuriLock™ Passive Anti-theft system behave as  
follows:  
When the ignition is in the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position, the indicator will  
not flash.  
When the igniton is in the 3 (ON) position, the indicator will glow for  
3 seconds to indicate the engine is enabled.  
Replacement keys  
If your keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key,  
you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The  
key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will  
need to be programmed.  
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key  
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any  
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional  
spare or replacement keys.  
Programming spare keys  
You can program your own coded keys to your vehicle. Please read and  
understand the entire procedure before you begin.  
Tips:  
A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle.  
Only use Securilock™ keys.  
You must have two previously programmed coded keys (keys that  
already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed  
key(s) readily accessible.  
If no previously programmed coded keys are available, you must take  
your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key(s)  
programmed.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
1. Insert a previously programmed  
coded key into the ignition.  
4
2. Turn the ignition from the 3  
(OFF) position to the 4 (ON)  
position. Keep the ignition in  
the 4 (ON) position for at least  
one second, but no more than  
10 seconds.  
3
1
5
2
3. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF)  
position, and remove the coded  
key from the ignition.  
4. Within ten seconds of removing the previously programmed coded  
key, insert the other previously programmed coded key into the  
ignition.  
5. Turn the ignition from the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position.  
Keep the ignition in the 4 (ON) position for at least one second but  
not more than 10 seconds.  
6. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position, and remove the second  
key from the ignition.  
7. Within twenty seconds of removing the previously programmed  
coded key, insert the unprogrammed key (new/valet key) into the  
ignition.  
8. Turn the ignition from the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position.  
Keep the ignition in the 4 (ON) position for at least one second.  
9. Your new unprogrammed key is now programmed.  
If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s  
engine and the theft indicator light will illuminate for three seconds and  
then go out. If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start  
your vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator light will flash on and off  
rapidly. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to  
have the new key(s) programmed.  
To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat this procedure  
from Step 1 for each additional key.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
SEATING  
Adjusting the front manual seat (if equipped)  
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the  
vehicle is moving. The seat could slide too far leaving you  
unable to operate vital controls just when you need them.  
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright  
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. Sitting in a  
reclined position while the vehicle is moving is dangerous  
because you cannot get the full protection from seat belts.  
During sudden braking or a collision, you can slide under the  
lap belt and suffer serious internal injuries. For maximum  
protection, sit well back and upright. The lap portion of the  
seat belt worn too high is dangerous. In a collision, this would  
concentrate the impact force directly on the abdominal area,  
causing serious injury. Wear the lap portion of the belt snugly  
and as low as possible.  
WARNING: The passenger sitting improperly out of position or  
with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the  
seat cushion and affect the decision of the front passenger  
sensing system, resulting in serious injury or death in a crash.  
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the  
floor.  
Lift the release bar to move seat  
forward or backward. Ensure that  
the seat is locked into place.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Pull lever located at the side of the  
seat cushion up to adjust seatback.  
60/40 seat (if equipped)  
To gain access to the storage  
compartment in your armrest (if  
equipped), lift the latch to open lid.  
The 60/40 seat cupholder (if  
equipped) is detachable for  
cleaning.  
Firmly grasp the bottom of the  
cup holder and pull up.  
To re-attach:  
Slide the cupholder over the two pins located on the front of the 60%  
driver’s seat.  
Press down until it is firmly latched into place.  
Passenger side rear access (if equipped)  
Pull up on the recliner handle. The  
seat will lean forward. Lift the  
release bar to move the seat forward  
to access the rear area of the cab.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
To return seat to original position, slide the seat bottom back, then push  
the seatback up to lock it in place. The seat will lock, and you will have  
to use the release bar to move the seat back to the original position.  
REAR SEATS  
Center facing jump seat (four–door Cab Plus 4) (if equipped)  
To open, pull seat assembly down,  
then raise seatback.  
To stow the seat, fold seat back  
down and raise seat assembly to the  
fully upright position.  
WARNING: Do not install a  
child seat in the center facing  
jump seats as there are no  
child restraints recommended  
for use in this seating position.  
WARNING: Booster seats must be installed only in seating  
positions equipped with a combination lap/shoulder belt.  
SAFETY RESTRAINTS  
Personal Safety System™  
The Personal Safety System™ provides an improved overall level of  
frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help  
further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to  
analyze different occupant classifications and conditions and crash  
severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better  
protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.  
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System™ consists of:  
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.  
Front outboard seat belts with pretensioners, energy management  
retractors, and seat belt usage sensors.  
Driver’s seat position sensor.  
Front crash severity sensor.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Front passenger sensing system  
Passenger Airbag Off indicator light.  
Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.  
Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.  
The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), seat belt  
pretensioners, front seat belt usage sensors, driver seat position  
sensor, and indicator lights.  
How does the Personal Safety System™ work?  
The Personal Safety System™ can adapt the deployment strategy of your  
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant  
classification and conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors  
provides information to the Restraints Control Module (RCM). During a  
crash, the RCM activates the seat belt pretensioners and/or either none,  
one, or both stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints  
based on crash severity and occupant classification and conditions.  
The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front  
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with  
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System™ determined  
the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not  
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags and  
pretensioners are designed to activate only in frontal and near-frontal  
collisions, not rollovers, side-impacts, or rear-impacts unless the collision  
causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.  
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints  
The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag  
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more  
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for  
the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag Supplemental Restraints  
section in this chapter.  
Front crash severity sensor  
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the  
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable  
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This  
allows your Personal Safety System™ to distinguish between different  
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the  
dual-stage airbags and seat belt pretensioners.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Driver’s seat position sensor  
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System™ to  
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat  
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting  
close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.  
Front passenger sensing system  
For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this  
force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close  
to the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, like infants  
in rear-facing child seats, this occurs because they are initially sitting  
very close to the airbag. For other occupants, this occurs when the  
occupant is not properly restrained by seat belts or child safety seats and  
they move forward during pre-crash braking. The most effective way to  
reduce the risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants are  
properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are much  
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the  
front.  
WARNING: Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.  
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air  
bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front  
seat, move the seat all the way back.  
WARNING: Always transport children 12 years old and under  
in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child  
restraints.  
The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the  
passenger front airbag when a rear facing child seat, a forward-facing  
child restraint, or a booster seat is detected. Even with this technology,  
parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly restrain children  
in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the airbag when the passenger  
seat is empty to prevent unnecessary replacement of the airbag(s) after  
a collision.  
When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has  
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the “pass airbag off” indicator  
will light and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal  
airbag is off. See Front passenger sensing system in the Airbag  
supplemental restraint system (SRS) section of this chapter.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Front seat belt usage sensors  
The front seat belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and  
front outboard passenger seat belts are fastened. This information allows  
your Personal Safety System™ to tailor the airbag deployment and seat  
belt pretensioner activation depending upon seat belt usage. Refer to  
Seat belt usage sensors later in this chapter.  
Front outboard seat belt pretensioners  
The seat belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are  
designed to tighten the seat belts firmly against the occupant’s body  
during frontal collisions. This helps increase the effectiveness of the seat  
belts. In frontal collisions, the seat belt pretensioners can be activated  
alone or, if the collision is of sufficient severity, together with the front  
airbags.  
Front outboard seat belt energy management retractors  
The front seat belt energy management retractors allow webbing to be  
pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled manner in  
response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps reduce the  
risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by limiting the load  
on the occupant. Refer to Energy management retractors section in  
this chapter.  
Determining if the Personal Safety System™ is operational  
The Personal Safety System™ uses a warning light in the instrument  
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer  
to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster  
chapter. Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System™ is not  
required.  
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits  
and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),  
seat belt pretensioners, front seat belt buckle sensors, front passenger  
sensing system, and the driver seat position sensor. In addition, the RCM  
also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument cluster. A  
difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following.  
The warning light will either flash or stay lit.  
The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is  
turned on.  
A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat  
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal  
Safety System™ serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless  
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a  
collision.  
Safety restraints precautions  
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright  
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit  
where they can be properly restrained.  
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap  
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the  
child from injury in a collision.  
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the  
vehicles is moving. Adjusting the driver’s seat while the vehicle  
is moving is dangerous. The driver could lose control of the  
vehicle and have an accident. Adjust the driver’s seat only when  
the vehicle is stopped.  
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,  
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in  
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do  
not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not  
equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your  
vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.  
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is  
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat  
belt.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific  
seat belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one  
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the  
shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the  
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never swing the seat belt  
around your neck over the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a  
single belt for more than one person.  
WARNING: On Cab Plus 4 vehicles, do not open the rear door  
when the rear seat belt is still buckled.  
Combination lap and shoulder belts  
1. Insert the belt tongue into the  
proper buckle (the buckle  
closest to the direction the  
tongue is coming from) until  
you hear a snap and feel it  
latch. Make sure the tongue is  
securely fastened in the buckle.  
2. To unfasten, push the release  
button and remove the tongue  
from the buckle.  
Adjusting the center and rear center facing jump seat lap belts  
The lap belt does not adjust automatically.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: The lap belts should fit snugly and as low as  
possible around the hips, not around the waist. Failure to  
position the lap belt correctly may cause serious injury in an  
accident.  
Insert the tongue into the correct  
buckle (the buckle closest to the  
direction the tongue is coming  
from). To lengthen the belt, turn the  
tongue at a right angle to the belt  
and pull across your lap until it  
reaches the buckle.  
To tighten the belt, pull the loose  
end of the belt through the tongue  
until it fits snugly across the hips.  
Shorten and fasten the belt  
when not in use to keep the belt  
away from door openings and  
available after unfolding the  
seats.  
For the rear jump seat, shorten and  
fold the belt into the seat when not  
in use.  
Energy Management Feature  
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an energy management  
feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce  
the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.  
This energy management system has a retractor assembly that is  
designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is  
designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.  
The front outboard safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap  
and shoulder belts. The front passenger outboard seat belt has two types  
of locking modes described below:  
Vehicle sensitive mode  
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length  
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner  
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph  
(8 km/h) or more, the combination seat belts will lock to help reduce  
forward movement of the driver and passengers.  
Automatic locking mode (outboard front passenger seating  
position only) for use with child safety seats  
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will  
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.  
The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver seat belt.  
When to use the automatic locking mode  
Any time a child safety seat is installed in a passenger front seat.  
Refer to Safety Restraints for Children or Safety Seats for Children  
later in this chapter.  
How to use the automatic locking mode (Outboard front passenger  
seating position only) for use with child safety seats  
Buckle the combination lap and  
shoulder belt.  
Grasp the shoulder portion and  
pull downward until the entire  
belt is pulled out.  
Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking  
sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the automatic locking  
mode.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
How to disengage the automatic locking mode  
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract  
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the  
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.  
WARNING: After any vehicle collision, the entire seat belt  
system should be checked for proper operation by an authorized  
dealer. Verify that the ؆automatic locking retractors” in all  
outboard seating positions are functioning properly.  
Additionally check that the ؆automatic locking mode؆ feature  
for child safety seat in the passenger outboard seating position  
is functioning properly.  
WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE  
REPLACED if the seat belt assembly “automatic locking  
retractor” feature or any other seat belt function is not  
operating properly when checked according to the procedures in  
Workshop Manual.  
WARNING: Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly  
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.  
Seat belt pretensioner  
Your vehicle is equipped with seat belt pretensioners at the driver and  
front outboard passenger seating positions.  
The seat belt pretensioner is a device which removes excess webbing  
from the seat belt system. The seat belt pretensioner uses the same  
crash sensor system as the front airbag supplemental restraint system  
(SRS). When the seat belt pretensioner deploys, webbing from the lap  
and shoulder belt is tightened. Refer to the Seat belt maintenance  
section in this chapter.  
WARNING: The driver and front passenger seat belt system  
(including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be  
replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in  
deployment of front airbags and seat belt pretensioners.  
Front seat belt height adjustment  
Your vehicle has seat belt height adjustments for the driver and front  
passenger. Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across  
the middle of your shoulder.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Regular Cab and four–door Cab  
Plus 4  
To lower the shoulder belt height,  
push the button and slide the height  
adjuster down. To raise the height  
of the shoulder belt, slide the height  
adjuster up. Pull down on the height  
adjuster to make sure it is locked in  
place.  
WARNING: Position the seat belt height adjusters so that the  
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust  
the seat belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat  
belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision.  
Seat belt extension assembly  
If the seat belt is too short when fully extended, a 9 inch (23 cm) or  
12 inch (31 cm) seat belt extension assembly can be added (part  
numbers 611C22–A and 611C22–B respectively). Seat belt extension  
assemblies can be obtained from your authorized Mazda dealership.  
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the seat belt.  
Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the  
label. Also, use the seat belt extension only if the seat belt is too short  
for you when fully extended.  
When you are not using the extensions store them in another location so  
that no one will accidentally use them.  
NOTE: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt  
across the torso.  
Seat belt maintenance  
Inspect the seat belt systems periodically to make sure they work  
properly and are not damaged.  
NOTE: If unsure about the proper procedures, bring your vehicle to an  
authorized Mazda dealership for inspection. Inspect the seat belts to  
make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts, replacing if necessary. Check  
the automatic locking retractor on the passenger outboard seating  
position. All seat belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat  
belt buckle assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on  
seatback (if equipped), child safety seat tether bracket assemblies (if  
equipped), and attaching hardware, should be inspected after a collision.  
Mazda recommends that all seat belt assemblies used in vehicles involved  
in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an  
authorized Mazda technician finds that the belts do not show damage  
and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Seat  
belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and  
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.  
The energy absorbing functions may have been activated in a collision so  
the restraints should be examined; if the front airbags have deployed, the  
pretensioners have also deployed and must be replaced — regardless of  
whether there was an occupant in the passenger seat or not.  
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the seat  
belt assembly under the above conditions could result in severe  
personal injuries in the event of a collision.  
Refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter.  
Seat belt warning light and indicator chime  
The seat belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a  
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their seat belts.  
Conditions of operation  
If...  
Then...  
The driver’s seat belt is not  
buckled before the ignition  
switch is turned to the ON  
position...  
The seat belt warning light illuminates  
1-2 minutes and the warning chime  
sounds 4-8 seconds.  
The driver’s seat belt is  
buckled while the indicator  
light is illuminated and the  
warning chime is sounding...  
The driver’s seat belt is  
buckled before the ignition  
switch is turned to the ON  
position...  
The seat belt warning light and  
warning chime turn off.  
The seat belt warning light and  
indicator chime remain off.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Belt-Minder  
The Belt-Minderfeature is a supplemental warning to the seat belt  
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by  
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the seat belt warning  
light in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s  
seat belt is unbuckled.  
The Belt-Minderfeature uses information from the front passenger  
sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and  
therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the  
Belt-Minderfeature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,  
warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined  
by the front passenger sensing system.  
Both the driver’s and passenger’s seat belt usages are monitored and  
either may activate the Belt-Minderfeature. The warnings are the same  
for the driver and the front passenger. If the Belt-Minderwarnings have  
expired (warnings for approximately 5 minutes) for one occupant (driver  
or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the  
Belt-Minderfeature.  
If...  
Then...  
The driver’s and front passenger’s The Belt-Minderfeature will not  
seat belts are buckled before the  
ignition switch is turned to the ON  
position or less than 1-2 minutes  
have elapsed since the ignition  
switch has been turned ON...  
activate.  
The driver’s or front passenger’s  
The Belt-Minderfeature is  
seat belt is not buckled when the activated - the seat belt warning  
vehicle has reached at least 3 mph light illuminates and the warning  
(5 km/h) and 1-2 minutes have  
elapsed since the ignition switch  
has been turned to ON...  
chime sounds for 6 seconds every  
30 seconds, repeating for  
approximately 5 minutes or until  
the seat belts are buckled.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
If...  
Then...  
The driver’s or front passenger’s  
seat belt becomes unbuckled for  
The Belt-Minderfeature is  
activated - the seat belt warning  
approximately 1 minute while the light illuminates and the warning  
vehicle is traveling at least 3 mph chime sounds for 6 seconds every  
(5 km/h) and more than 1-2  
30 seconds, repeating for  
minutes have elapsed since the  
approximately 5 minutes or until  
ignition switch has been turned to the seat belts are buckled.  
ON...  
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing seat belts  
(All statistics based on U.S. data):  
Reasons given... Consider...  
ЉCrashes are rare 36,700 crashes occur every day. The more we  
eventsЉ  
drive, the more we are exposed to ЉrareЉ events,  
even for good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be  
seriously injured in a crash during our  
lifetime.  
ЉI’m not going farЉ 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles of home.  
ЉBelts are  
uncomfortableЉ  
Seat belts are designed to enhance comfort. If you  
are uncomfortable - try different positions for the  
seat belt upper anchorage and seatback which  
should be as upright as possible; this can improve  
comfort.  
ЉI was in a hurryЉ Prime time for an accident. Seat Belt Warning  
Chime reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle  
up.  
ЉSeat belts don’t  
workЉ  
Seat belts, when used properly, reduce risk of  
death to front seat occupants by 45% in cars,  
and by 60% in light trucks.  
ЉTraffic is lightЉ  
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single-vehicle  
crashes, many when no other vehicles are around.  
ЉBelts wrinkle my Possibly, but a serious crash can do much more  
clothesЉ  
than wrinkle your clothes, particularly if you are  
unbelted.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Reasons given... Consider...  
ЉThe people I’m  
with don’t wear  
beltsЉ  
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4 times more  
often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people.  
Children and younger brothers/sisters imitate  
behavior they see.  
ЉI have an airbagЉ Airbags offer greater protection when used with  
seat belts. Frontal airbags are not designed to  
inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers.  
ЉI’d rather be  
thrown clearЉ  
Not a good idea. People who are ejected are 40  
times more likely to DIE. Seat belts help  
prevent ejection, WE CAN’T ЉPICK OUR CRASHЉ.  
WARNING: Always wear the seat belt. Do not be tempted to sit  
on top of the belt to fool police or to defeat the warning  
system. The seat belt and seat belt warning system are there to  
protect your life.  
One time disable  
If at any time the driver/front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles  
the seat belt for that seating position, the Belt-Minderis disabled for  
the current ignition cycle. The Belt-Minderfeature will enable during  
the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and remains buckled for  
approximately 30 seconds. Confirmation is not given for the one time  
disable.  
Deactivating/activating the Belt-Minderfeature  
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minderare  
deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating  
one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will  
terminate the process.  
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the  
deactivation/activation programming procedure.  
Note: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minderfeatures must be  
disabled/enabled separately. Both cannot be disable/enabled during the  
same key cycle.  
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minderfeatures can be  
deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:  
Before following the procedure, make sure that:  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
The parking brake is set  
The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)  
The ignition switch is in the OFF position  
The driver and front passenger seat belts are unbuckled  
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your  
Belt-Minder, this system is designed to improve your chances  
of being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend  
you leave the Belt-Mindersystem activated for yourself and  
others who may use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do  
not deactivate/activate the Belt-Minderfeature while driving  
the vehicle.  
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT  
START THE ENGINE)  
2. Wait until the seat belt warning light turns off. (Approximately  
1 minute)  
Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the seat belt  
warning light turns off.  
3. For the seating position being disabled, at a moderate speed, buckle  
then unbuckle the seat belt 9 times, ending in the unbuckled state.  
(Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the seat belt  
warning light turns off.)  
After Step 3, the seat belt warning light will be turned on for three  
seconds.  
4. Within approximately 7 seconds of the light turning off, buckle then  
unbuckle the seat belt.  
This will disable the Belt-Minderfeature for that seating position if it  
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the seat belt warning light will  
flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds.  
This will enable the Belt-Minderfeature for that seating position if it  
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the seat belt warning light will  
flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds, followed by 3 seconds with the  
light off, then followed by the seat belt warning light flashing 4 times  
per second for 3 seconds again.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)  
The airbag supplemental restraint system is designed to work in  
conjunction with the seat belts to help protect the driver and front  
outboard passenger from certain upper body injuries. The term  
“supplemental restraint” means the airbags are intended as a supplement  
to the seat belts. Airbags alone cannot protect as well as airbags plus  
seat belts in impacts for which the airbags are designed to deploy, and  
airbags do not offer any protection in crashes for which they do not  
deploy.  
The airbag supplemental restraint system consists of:  
driver and passenger dual stage airbag modules (which include the  
inflators and airbags).  
one or more impact and safing sensors.  
the same indicator light, RCM (restraints control module) and  
diagnostic unit used for the Personal safety system.  
Front passenger sensing system  
Passenger airbag off indicator light.  
The airbag supplemental restraints are an integral part of the Personal  
Safety System. They are designed to be deployed in cases where the  
Personal Safety System has determined the occupant conditions and  
crash severity are appropriate to activate these devices. Refer to the  
Personal Safety System section in this chapter.  
Important supplemental restraint system (SRS) precautions  
The supplemental restraint system is designed to work with the seat belt  
to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper  
body injuries.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: Airbags DO NOT  
inflate slowly or gently and the  
risk of injury from a deploying  
airbag is greatest close to the  
trim covering the airbag  
module. Always wear your seat  
belt.  
WARNING: Airbags have been known to kill or injure a child in  
front facing child restraints. When placing a child safety seat in  
a front seating position including the center (if equipped), you  
should make sure that the passenger airbag is off. If the child  
safety seat is in the outboard seating position, slide the seat all  
the way back.  
WARNING: Do not install a  
child seat in a center facing  
jump seat.  
WARNING: Rear facing child  
seats should NEVER be placed  
in front of an active airbag.  
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,  
should always properly wear their seat belts, even when an air  
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration  
(NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 25 cm  
(10 inches) between an occupant’s chest and the driver air bag  
module.  
WARNING: Never place your arm or feet over the airbag  
module as a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures  
or other injuries.  
Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the airbag:  
Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the  
pedals comfortably.  
Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright  
position.  
WARNING: Do not put anything on or over the airbag module  
including hands or feet. Placing objects on or over the airbag  
inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the  
airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury.  
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the  
Airbag Supplemental Restraint System or its fuses. See your  
authorized Mazda dealership.  
WARNING: Modifications to the front end of the vehicle,  
including frame, bumper, front end body structure, tow hooks  
and snow plows may effect the performance of the airbag  
sensors increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front  
end of the vehicle.  
WARNING: Additional equipment may effect the performance  
of the airbag sensors increasing the risk of injury. Consult your  
authorized Mazda dealership before installation of additional  
equipment.  
WARNING: The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer  
protection to an occupant in the center front seating position.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Children and airbags  
For additional important safety information, read all information on  
safety restraints in this guide.  
WARNING: Do not install a  
child seat in a center facing  
jump seat.  
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.  
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active  
airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front  
seat, move the seat all the way back.  
WARNING: Booster seats must be installed only in seating  
positions equipped with a combination lap/shoulder belt.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit  
where they can be properly restrained.  
How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?  
The airbag SRS is designed to  
activate when the vehicle sustains  
sufficient longitudinal deceleration.  
The fact that the airbags did not  
inflate in a collision does not mean  
that something is wrong with the  
system. Rather, it means the forces  
were not of the type sufficient to  
cause activation. Airbags are  
designed to inflate in frontal and  
near-frontal collisions, not rollover,  
side-impact, or rear-impacts.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
The airbags inflate and deflate  
rapidly upon activation. After airbag  
deployment, it is normal to notice a  
smoke-like, powdery residue or  
smell the burnt propellant. This may  
consist of cornstarch, talcum  
powder (to lubricate the bag) or  
sodium compounds (e.g., baking  
soda) that result from the  
combustion process that inflates the  
airbag. Small amounts of sodium  
hydroxide may be present which  
may irritate the skin and eyes, but  
none of the residue is toxic.  
While the system is designed to help  
reduce serious injuries, it may also  
cause minor abrasions, swelling or temporary hearing loss. Because  
airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk  
of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or  
internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly  
restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag  
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly  
restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while  
maintaining vehicle control.  
WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after  
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation or you may be  
burned.  
WARNING: If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not  
function again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag  
is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of  
injury in a collision.  
Determining if the system is operational  
The SRS uses readiness lights in the instrument cluster or a tone to  
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness  
section in the Instrumentation chapter. Routine maintenance of the  
airbag is not required.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:  
The readiness lights will either  
flash or stay lit.  
The readiness lights will not  
illuminate immediately after  
ignition is turned on.  
A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat  
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.  
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced  
at your authorized Mazda dealership immediately.  
WARNING: Unless serviced, the system may not function  
properly in the event of a collision.  
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles  
(including seat belt pretensioners)  
For disposal of seat belt pretensioners, airbags, or airbag equipped  
vehicles, see your authorized Mazda dealership or qualified technician.  
Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel.  
Front passenger sensing system  
The front passenger sensing system will turn off the front passenger’s  
frontal air bag under certain conditions. The driver’s frontal air bag is not  
part of the front passenger sensing system. The front passenger sensing  
system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger’s seat and  
seat belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly  
seated occupant and determine if the front passenger’s frontal air bag  
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.  
The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory  
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208  
and is designed to turn off the front passenger’s frontal air bag if:  
the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in  
the front seat,  
the system determines that a small child is present in a rear-facing  
child seat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions.  
the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing  
child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’s  
instructions,  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat,  
a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of  
time,  
WARNING: Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children  
12 and under should be properly restrained in the back seat (if  
equipped).  
When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has  
turned off the passenger’s frontal air bag, the Љpassenger air bag offЉ or  
Љpass air bag offЉ indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the  
front passenger frontal air bag is off. When the front passenger seat is  
not occupied (empty seat) or in the event that the front passenger  
frontal air bag is enabled (may inflate), the indicator light will be unlit.  
The indicator light is located in the  
center stack of the instrument  
panel. To confirm the Љpass airbag  
lightЉ is functional, it will  
momentarily illuminate when the  
ignition is turned to the ON  
position.  
The front passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the front  
passenger’s frontal air bag when a rear facing child seat, a forward-facing  
child restraint, or a booster seat is detected. If the child restraint has  
been installed and the indicator is not lit, then turn the vehicle off,  
remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint  
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions.  
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)  
the right front passenger’s frontal air bag anytime the system senses that  
a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.  
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the air bag to be  
enabled, the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit to remind you that the  
air bag is enabled (may inflate).  
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the  
Љpassenger air bag offЉ or Љpass air bag offЉ indicator is lit, it could be  
that the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens, turn the  
vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the full upright  
position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with  
the person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle and have the  
person remain in this position for about two minutes. This will allow the  
system to detect that person and then enable the passenger’s air bag. If  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, then the occupant should  
be advised to ride in the back seat.  
Pass Airbag Off  
Indicator Lamp  
Occupant  
Passenger Airbag  
Empty seat  
Small child in child safety  
seat or booster  
Unlit  
Lit  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Small child with seat belt  
buckled or unbuckled  
Adult  
Lit  
Disabled  
Unlit  
Enabled  
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on seat belts, it’s  
very important that they continue to sit upright, with their back against  
the seatback, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor while the  
vehicle is still in motion. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of  
injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,  
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or  
both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.  
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat  
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion  
and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system,  
resulting in serious injury or death in a crash.  
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the  
floor.  
In case there is a problem with the  
passenger sensing system, the  
airbag readiness lamp in the  
instrument cluster will stay lit. Do  
NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle  
immediately to the dealer.  
WARNING: The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer  
protection to an occupant in the center seating position.  
WARNING: An out of position front center occupant could  
affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to  
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Mazda Customer  
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer  
Assistance section of this Owner’s Manual.  
The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects  
placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front  
passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the  
passenger airbag is disabled, the Љpass airbag offЉ light may or may not  
be illuminated according to the table below.  
Pass Airbag Off  
Indicator Lamp  
Objects  
Passenger Airbag  
Small (i.e. 3 ring binder,  
small purse, bottled water)  
Medium (i.e. heavy  
briefcase, fully packed  
luggage)  
Empty seat, or small to  
medium object with seat  
belt buckled  
Unlit  
Disabled  
Lit  
Lit  
Disabled  
Disabled  
WARNING: Any alteration/modification to the front passenger  
seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing  
system.  
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN  
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety  
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system  
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.  
Important child restraint precautions  
NOTE: You are required by law to use a child-restraint system in the  
U.S. and Canada. Many states require that children use approved booster  
seats until they are eight years old. Check your local and state or  
provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children  
in your vehicle.  
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap  
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the  
child from injury in a collision.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
NOTE: Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any  
infant or child restraint you might use.  
WARNING: Do not install a child seat in a center facing jump  
seat.  
Children and seat belts  
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat.  
Children who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your  
child safety seat manufacturer) should always wear seat belts.  
Follow all the important safety restraint and airbag precautions that  
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.  
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can  
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or  
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child  
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt  
fit.  
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets  
unattended in your vehicle. Leaving a child or an animal  
unattended in a parked vehicle is dangerous. In hot weather,  
temperatures inside a vehicle can become high enough to cause  
brain damage or even death. Always take all children and  
animals with you or leave a responsible person with them.  
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous.  
This could result in someone being badly injured or even killed.  
They could play with power windows or other controls, or even  
make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys in your vehicle  
with children.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Child booster seats  
Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh  
40 pounds and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulder belt  
will provide some protection, these children are still too small for  
lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious  
injury.  
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who  
have outgrown child safety seats, Mazda recommends use of a  
belt-positioning booster seat.  
Booster seats position a child so that seat belts fit better. They lift the  
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees  
bend comfortably. Booster seats also make the shoulder belt fit better  
and more comfortably for growing children.  
When children should use booster seats  
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the  
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and  
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about  
80 lb. (about 8 to 12 years old).  
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these  
questions:  
Can the child sit all the way back  
against the vehicle seat back with  
knees bent comfortably at the  
edge of the seat without  
slouching?  
Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?  
Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?  
Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?  
WARNING: Booster seats must be installed only in seating  
positions equipped with a combination lap/shoulder belt.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Types of booster seats  
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:  
Those that are backless.  
If your backless booster seat has a  
removable shield, remove the  
shield and use the lap/shoulder  
belt. If a seating position has a  
low seat back and no head  
restraint, a backless booster seat  
may place your child’s head (top  
of ear level) above the top of the  
seat. In this case, use a  
high-backed booster seat.  
Those with a high back.  
If, with a backless booster seat,  
you cannot find a seating position  
that adequately supports your  
child’s head, a high back booster  
seat would be a better choice.  
Both can be used in any vehicle in a seating position equipped with  
lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lb..  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Children and booster seats vary widely in size and shape. Choose a  
booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up  
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the  
chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings  
below compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably  
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder.  
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh  
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this  
condition.  
The importance of shoulder belts  
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s  
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should  
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster  
seat with combination lap/shoulder belts.  
WARNING: Follow all instructions provided by the  
manufacturer of the booster seat.  
WARNING: Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or  
behind the back because it eliminates the protection for the  
upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or  
death in a collision.  
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a  
child. They can slide around and increase the likelihood of  
injury or death in a collision.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN  
Child and infant or child safety seats  
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the  
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the  
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the  
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or  
collision.  
When installing a child safety seat:  
Review and follow the information  
presented in the Airbag  
Supplemental Restraint System  
section in this chapter.  
Use the correct seat belt buckle  
for that seating position (the  
buckle closest to the direction the  
tongue is coming from).  
Insert the belt tongue into the  
proper buckle until you hear a  
snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the  
buckle.  
WARNING: Do not install a child seat in a center facing jump  
seat.  
Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety  
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,  
to prevent accidental unbuckling.  
Place seat back in upright position.  
Put the seat belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic  
locking mode (passenger side front seat).  
Top tether anchors can be used for children up to 60 pounds (27 kg)  
in a child restraint, and to provide upper torso restraint for children  
up to 80 pounds (36 kg) using an upper torso harness and a  
belt-positioning booster.  
Mazda recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether  
strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position which is capable  
of providing a tether anchorage. For more information on top tether  
straps, refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s  
instructions included with the safety seat you put in your  
vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly,  
the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision.  
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder  
belts (front outboard passenger seat only)  
1. Position the child safety seat in  
a seat with a combination lap  
and shoulder belt.  
WARNING: If there is a tether on the child safety seat, attach  
it to the tether anchor point. Refer to Attaching child safety  
seats with tether straps in this chapter.  
WARNING: Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in  
front of an active airbag.  
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt  
and then grasp the shoulder  
belt and lap belt together.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
3. While holding the shoulder and  
lap belt portions together, route  
the tongue through the child  
seat according to the child seat  
manufacturer’s instructions. Be  
sure the belt webbing is not  
twisted.  
4. Insert the belt tongue into the  
proper buckle (the buckle  
closest to the direction the  
tongue is coming from) for that  
seating position until you hear  
and feel the latch engage. Make  
sure the tongue is latched  
securely by pulling on it.  
5. To put the retractor in the  
automatic locking mode, grasp  
the shoulder portion of the belt  
and pull downward until all of  
the belt is extracted and a click  
is heard.  
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate  
it is in the automatic locking mode.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
7. Pull the lap belt portion across  
the child seat toward the buckle  
and pull up on the shoulder belt  
while pushing down with knee  
on the child seat.  
8. Allow the seat belt to retract to  
remove any slack in the belt.  
9. Before placing the child in the  
seat, forcibly tilt the seat  
forward and back to make sure  
the seat is securely held in  
place. To check this, grab the  
seat at the belt path and  
attempt to move it side to side  
and forward. There should be  
no more than one inch of  
movement for proper installation.  
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is  
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more  
belt out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat  
Steps two through nine.  
11. See Attaching child safety seats with tether straps in this chapter.  
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.  
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps  
Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which  
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether  
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact  
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a  
tether strap.  
The tether anchors in your vehicle are located on the back of the front  
seat cushion.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions  
(shown from top view):  
Bucket seats  
60/40 seats  
WARNING: Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate  
tether anchor as shown. The tether strap may not work  
properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether  
anchor.  
WARNING: Never attach two child safety seat tethers to a  
single tether anchor. In a crash, on anchor may not be strong  
enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may  
break, causing serious injury or death.  
1. Position the child safety seat on the front seat cushion.  
2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
3. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position.  
The tether anchor is located on the  
rear lower portion of the passenger  
seat.  
4. Clip the tether strap to the  
anchor.  
WARNING: If the tether strap  
is clipped incorrectly, the child  
safety seat may not be  
retained properly in the event  
of a collision.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Center seating location 60/40 seats with folding armrest  
When installing a child safety seat in the center position, route the tether  
strap over the center arm rest and clip it to the center anchor.  
WARNING: If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child  
safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a  
collision.  
5. Refer to the Installing child safety seats in combination lap and  
shoulder belt seating positions section of this chapter for further  
instructions to secure the child safety seat.  
6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the  
manufacturer’s instructions.  
WARNING: If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk  
of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS  
Utility vehicles and trucks handle  
differently than passenger cars in  
the various driving conditions that  
are encountered on streets,  
highways and off-road. Utility  
vehicles and trucks are not designed  
for cornering at speeds as high as  
passenger cars any more than  
low-slung sports cars are designed  
to perform satisfactorily under  
off-road conditions.  
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover  
rate than other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious  
injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must:  
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;  
Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;  
Keep tires properly inflated;  
Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and  
Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.  
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is  
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat  
belt. All occupants must wear seat belts and children/infants  
must use appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury  
or ejection.  
Study your Owner’s Manual and any supplements for specific  
information about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and  
additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.  
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS  
4WD and AWD Systems (if equipped)  
A vehicle equipped with AWD or 4WD (when selected) has the ability to  
use all four wheels to power itself. This increases traction which may  
enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a  
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case or power  
transfer unit. 4WD vehicles allow you to select different drive modes as  
necessary. Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures  
can be found in the Driving chapter. Information on transfer case  
maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and Specifications  
chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this information  
before you operate your vehicle.  
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4WD  
while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting  
sound. These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to  
speed and is not cause for concern.  
WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD  
and AWD vehicles. Although a 4WD or AWD vehicle may  
accelerate better than two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction  
situations, it won’t stop any faster than two-wheel drive  
vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.  
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles  
SUV and trucks can differ from  
some other vehicles in a few  
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may  
be:  
Higher – to allow higher load  
carrying capacity and to allow it  
to travel over rough terrain  
without getting hung up or  
damaging underbody components.  
Shorter – to give it the capability  
to approach inclines and drive  
over the crest of a hill without  
getting hung up or damaging  
underbody components. All other  
things held equal, a shorter  
wheelbase may make your vehicle  
quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer  
wheelbase.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Narrower — to provide greater  
maneuverability in tight spaces,  
particularly in off-road use.  
As a result of the above dimensional  
differences, SUV’s and trucks often  
will have a higher center of gravity  
and a greater difference in center of  
gravity between the loaded and  
unloaded condition.  
These differences that make your  
vehicle so versatile also make it  
handle differently than an ordinary  
passenger car.  
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING  
New vehicles are fitted with tires  
that have a rating on them called  
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality  
grades can be found where  
applicable on the tire sidewall  
between tread shoulder and  
maximum section width. For  
example:  
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A  
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United  
States Department of Transportation has set.  
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger  
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,  
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim  
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in  
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).  
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.  
Department of Transportation requires Mazda to give you the following  
information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Treadwear  
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of  
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified  
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one  
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire  
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual  
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the  
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and  
differences in road characteristics and climate.  
Traction AA A B C  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The  
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured  
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of  
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction  
performance.  
NOTE: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on  
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration,  
cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.  
Temperature A B C  
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the  
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat  
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory  
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire  
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to  
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance  
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of  
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by  
law.  
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established  
for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.  
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either  
separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and  
possible tire failure.  
TIRES  
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they  
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Glossary of tire terminology  
Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,  
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle  
can carry.  
Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of  
each tire providing information about the tire brand and  
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred  
to as DOT code.  
Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.  
Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a  
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing  
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s  
load carrying capability.  
Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a  
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].  
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase  
the tire’s load carrying capability.  
kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.  
PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.  
Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has  
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and  
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).  
Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found  
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on  
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.  
B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the  
front door.  
Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.  
Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.  
Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that  
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.  
Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly  
upon which the tire beads are seated.  
INFLATING YOUR TIRES  
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly  
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure  
without appearing flat.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the  
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if  
required.  
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check  
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate  
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Mazda.  
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare  
(if equipped), at least monthly and before long trips. You are strongly  
urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station  
gauges may be inaccurate. Mazda recommends the use of a digital or dial  
type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge.  
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire  
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause  
uneven treadwear patterns.  
NOTE: If you are driving the vehicle at its maximum weight load, make  
sure the tire inflation pressure is correct for the weight load on the tires.  
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire  
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation  
or ؆blowout؆, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and  
increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall  
flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and  
internal damage to the tire. It also may result in unnecessary  
tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents.  
A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to  
be flat!  
Always inflate your tires to the Mazda recommended inflation pressure  
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found  
on the tire. The Mazda recommended tire inflation pressure is found on  
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located  
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire  
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and  
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.  
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufactures’  
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the  
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally  
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure  
which can be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label  
or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the  
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or  
Tire Label.  
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also  
change. A 10° F (6° C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding  
drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures  
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found  
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.  
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more  
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are  
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above  
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold  
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.  
To check the pressure in your tire(s):  
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving  
even a mile.  
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check  
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure  
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air  
pressure inside to go up as you drive. Never “bleed” or reduce air  
pressure when tires are hot.  
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire  
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.  
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure  
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in  
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.  
4. Replace the valve cap.  
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.  
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the  
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see T-Type/Mini-Spare Tire  
Information section for description): Store and maintain at 60psi  
(4.15 bars). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see Dissimilar  
Spare Tire/Wheel Information section for description): Store and  
maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown  
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.  
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other  
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air  
leak.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or  
bulges.  
TIRE CARE  
Inspecting your tires  
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and  
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the  
tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from  
the tire and make necessary repairs. Also inspect the tire sidewalls for  
cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If  
internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and  
inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety,  
tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be  
used because they are more likely to blow out or fail.  
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear  
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and  
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:  
Tire wear  
When the tread is worn down to  
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must  
be replaced to help prevent your  
vehicle from skidding and  
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear  
indicators, or “wear bars”, which  
look like narrow strips of smooth  
rubber across the tread will appear  
on the tire when the tread is worn  
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).  
When the tire tread wears down to  
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be  
replaced.  
Damage  
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as  
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and  
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected  
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged  
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also  
recommended.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
WARNING: Age  
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as  
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,  
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their  
lives.  
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of  
tread wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent  
high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and  
may require tires to be replaced more frequently.  
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road  
tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been  
used.  
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)  
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to  
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This  
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of  
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for  
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.  
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all  
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code  
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size  
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was  
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After  
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th  
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for  
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect  
requires a recall.  
Tire replacement requirements  
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and  
handling capability.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the  
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric  
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those  
originally provided by Mazda. The recommended tire and wheel  
size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification  
Label or the Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or edge  
of the driver’s door. If this information is not found on these  
labels then you should consult your Mazda dealer. Use of any  
tire or wheel not recommended by Mazda can affect the safety  
and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an  
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,  
personal injury and death. Additionally the use of  
non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering,  
suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If  
you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an  
authorized dealer.  
WARNING: When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you  
should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the  
sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional  
precautions listed below. If the beads do not seat at the  
maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and try again.  
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi  
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the  
following precautions must be taken to protect the person  
mounting the tire:  
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.  
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.  
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet away from the tire wheel assembly.  
4. Use both eye and ear protection.  
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi greater than the maximum  
pressure, a Mazda Dealer or other tire service professional should do  
the mounting.  
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person  
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft. away from the tire wheel  
assembly.  
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road  
tires are replaced on your vehicle.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be  
replaced as a pair.  
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on  
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.  
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Mazda Motor  
Corporation may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System.  
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your  
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some  
component of the TPMS may be damaged.  
Safety practices  
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.  
Observe posted speed limits  
Avoid fast starts, stops and turns  
Avoid potholes and objects on the road  
Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking  
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do  
not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire  
and cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three  
to five seconds.  
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).  
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.  
Highway hazards  
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you  
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the  
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but  
your safety is more important.  
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you  
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your  
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and  
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,  
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If  
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair  
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Tire and wheel alignment  
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your  
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your  
vehicle seems to pull to one side, vibrate or shake when you’re driving,  
the wheels may be out of alignment. Have a qualified technician at a  
Mazda dealer check the wheel alignment periodically.  
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid  
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by a qualified technician  
at a Mazda dealer. Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an  
independent rear suspension require alignment of all four wheels.  
The tire should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and  
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.  
NOTE: When it is time to replace front tires with new ones, this is an  
ideal time to perform an alignment. New tires should be balanced at the  
time they are installed.  
Tire rotation  
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the  
Scheduled maintenance section of the Maintenance and  
Specifications chapter) will help your tires wear more evenly, providing  
better tire performance and longer tire life.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Front Wheel Drive (FWD)  
vehicles (front tires at top of  
diagram)  
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)  
vehicles/Four Wheel Drive  
(4WD)/All Wheel Drive (AWD)  
vehicles (front tires at top of  
diagram)  
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask a qualified technician at a  
Mazda dealership to check for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire  
imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation.  
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A  
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is  
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If  
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use  
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.  
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked  
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.  
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL  
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to  
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This  
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of  
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for  
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.  
Information on “P” type tires  
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a  
tire size, load index and speed  
rating. The definitions of these  
items are listed below. (Note that  
the tire size, load index and speed  
rating for your vehicle may be  
different from this example.)  
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated  
by the Tire and Rim Association  
(T&RA), that may be used for  
service on cars, SUVs, minivans  
and light trucks.  
Note: If your tire size does not  
begin with a letter this may mean it  
is designated by either ETRTO  
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire  
Manufacturing Association).  
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from  
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the  
wider the tire.  
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to  
width.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.  
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change  
your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the  
new wheel diameter.  
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how  
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your  
Owner’s Manual. If not, contact a local tire dealer.  
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not  
required by federal law.  
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the  
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods  
of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure.  
The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load  
and inflation pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted  
for the difference in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph  
(130 km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the  
following chart.  
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not  
required by federal law.  
Letter rating  
Speed rating - mph (km/h)  
81 mph (130 km/h)  
87 mph (140 km/h)  
99 mph (159 km/h)  
106 mph (171 km/h)  
112 mph (180 km/h)  
118 mph (190 km/h)  
124 mph (200 km/h)  
130 mph (210 km/h)  
149 mph (240 km/h)  
168 mph (270 km/h)  
186 mph (299 km/h)  
M
N
Q
R
S
T
U
H
V
W
Y
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph  
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For  
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire  
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with  
the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal  
standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code  
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire  
size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the  
tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of  
1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501  
means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are  
identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to  
contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.  
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or  
AT: All Terrain, or  
AS: All Season.  
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number  
of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire  
tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply  
materials in the tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon,  
polyester, and others.  
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and  
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety  
Compliance Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or  
the edge of the driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your  
vehicle.  
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades  
Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the  
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a  
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150  
would wear one and one-half (112) times as well on the government  
course as a tire graded 100.  
Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,  
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement  
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test  
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor  
traction performance.  
Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,  
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its  
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a  
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire  
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at  
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is  
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation  
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification  
Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of  
the driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set  
lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.  
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such  
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.  
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type  
tires  
“LT” type tires have some additional  
information beyond those of “P”  
type tires; these differences are  
described below:  
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated  
by the Tire and Rim Association  
(T&RA), that is intended for  
service on light trucks.  
2. Load Range/Load Inflation  
Limits: Indicates the tire’s  
load-carrying capabilities and its  
inflation limits.  
3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg)  
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates  
the maximum load and tire  
pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined as four tires on the  
rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).  
4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the  
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;  
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Information on “T” type tires  
“T” type tires have some additional  
information beyond those of “P”  
type tires; these differences are  
described below:  
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire  
size.  
Note: The temporary tire size for  
your vehicle may be different from  
this example.  
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,  
designated by the Tire and Rim  
Association (T&RA), that is  
intended for temporary service  
on cars, SUVs, minivans and  
light trucks.  
2. 145: Indicates the nominal  
width of the tire in millimeters  
from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the  
number, the wider the tire.  
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to  
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.  
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.  
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.  
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change  
your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the  
new wheel diameter.  
Location of the tire label  
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size  
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of  
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the  
Vehicle loading — with and without a trailer section.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)  
Each tire, including the spare (if  
provided), should be checked  
monthly when cold and inflated to  
the inflation pressure recommended  
by the vehicle manufacturer on the  
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires  
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire  
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation  
pressure for those tires.)  
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire  
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure  
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.  
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should  
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the  
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the  
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces  
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling  
and stopping ability.  
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire  
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire  
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger  
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.  
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator  
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS  
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.  
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for  
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.  
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as  
the malfunction exists.  
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be  
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions  
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of  
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the  
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction  
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to  
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the  
TPMS to continue to function properly.  
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC  
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful  
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
WARNING: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a  
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire  
pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly)  
using a tire gauge, see Inflating your tires in this chapter.  
Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase  
the risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and  
personal injury.  
Changing tires with TPMS  
Each road tire is equipped with  
a tire pressure sensor fastened  
to the inside rim of the wheel.  
The pressure sensor is covered  
by the tire and is not visible  
unless the tire is removed. The  
pressure sensor is located  
opposite (180 degrees) from the  
valve stem. Care must be taken  
when changing the tire to avoid  
damaging the sensor. It is  
recommended that you always have  
your tires serviced by an authorized  
dealer.  
The tire pressure should be checked  
periodically (at least monthly) using  
an accurate tire gauge, refer to  
Inflating your tires in this chapter.  
Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)  
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four  
road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The Low  
Tire Pressure Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is  
significantly low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under  
inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire  
pressure. Even if the light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF,  
your tire pressure still needs to be checked.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
When your temporary spare tire is installed  
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary  
spare, the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you  
that the damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on  
your vehicle.  
To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System,  
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your  
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMS  
in this section.  
When you believe your system is not operating properly  
The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you  
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is  
no longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the  
following chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System:  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Low Tire Pressure Possible cause Customer Action Required  
Warning Light  
Solid Warning Light Tire(s)  
under-inflated  
1. Check your tire pressure to  
ensure tires are properly  
inflated; refer to Inflating  
your tires in this chapter.  
2. After inflating your tires to  
the manufacturer’s  
recommended inflation  
pressure as shown on the Tire  
Label (located on the edge of  
driver’s door or the B-Pillar),  
the vehicle must be driven for  
at least two minutes over  
20 mph (32 km/h) before the  
light will turn OFF.  
Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in  
use. Repair the damaged road  
wheel/tire and reinstall it on  
the vehicle to restore system  
functionality. For a description  
on how the system functions,  
refer to When your temporary  
spare tire is installed in this  
section.  
TPMS  
malfunction  
If your tires are properly  
inflated and your spare tire is  
not in use and the light  
remains ON, have the system  
inspected by your authorized  
dealer.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Low Tire Pressure Possible cause Customer Action Required  
Warning Light  
Flashing Warning  
Light  
Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in  
use. Repair the damaged road  
wheel and re-mount it on the  
vehicle to restore system  
functionality. For a description  
of how the system functions  
under these conditions, refer to  
When your temporary spare  
tire is installed in this section.  
TPMS  
malfunction  
If your tires are properly  
inflated and your spare tire is  
not in use and the TPMS  
warning light still flashes, have  
the system inspected by your  
authorized dealer.  
When inflating your tires  
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your  
garage), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond  
immediately to the air added to your tires.  
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the  
light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended  
inflation pressure.  
How temperature affects your tire pressure  
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in  
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical  
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi  
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary  
over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the  
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi  
(20.7 kPa) for a drop of 30° F (16.6°C) in ambient temperature. This  
lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly  
lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS  
warning for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is  
ON, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more  
tires are flat, repair as necessary.) Check air pressure in the road tires. If  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest  
location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the  
recommended inflation pressure.  
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS  
WARNING: Driving too fast for conditions creates the possibility  
of loss of vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds for extended  
periods of time may result in damage to vehicle components.  
NOTE: Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you  
currently have on your vehicle.  
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in  
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow  
tires and chains. If you need to use snow tires and chains, it is  
recommended that steel wheels are used of the same size and  
specifications as those originally installed.  
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:  
Do not use tire chains on aluminum wheels. Chains may chip the wheels.  
Use only SAE Class S chains.  
Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any  
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.  
Drive cautiously. Ensure you obtain the proper cables or chains for  
you vehicle. Test fit the cables or chains before using them in snow  
and/or ice. If you hear the cables or chains rub or bang against the  
vehicle, stop and retighten them. If this does not work, remove the  
cables or chains to prevent vehicle damage. Have the cables or  
chains fitted by a professional before proceeding.  
If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.  
Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use  
tire chains on dry roads.  
The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle  
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when  
using snow tires and chains.  
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER  
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or  
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating  
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading  
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining  
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s  
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:  
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of  
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or  
optional equipment.  
Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you  
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.  
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the  
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found  
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door  
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire  
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND  
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for  
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum  
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket  
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the  
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the  
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.  
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle  
can be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is  
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle  
should carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of  
your vehicle, do not add more cargo, even if there is space  
available. Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can  
contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Example only:  
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,  
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load  
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.  
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle  
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable  
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These  
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label  
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total  
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.  
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in  
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your  
authorized dealer.  
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +  
passengers.  
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight  
Rating) – is the maximum  
MFD. BY FORD MOTOR CO. IN U.S.A.  
FOR MAZDA MOTOR CORPORATION  
GVWR:XXXXXLB/ XXXXXKG  
DATE: XX/XX  
FRONT GAWR: XXXXL  
XXXXKG  
REAR GAWR:  
XXXXKG  
XXXXLB  
allowable weight of the fully loaded  
vehicle (including all options,  
equipment, passengers and cargo).  
The GVWR is shown on the  
Safety Compliance Certification  
Label located on the B-Pillar or  
the edge of the driver’s door.  
The GVW must never exceed the  
GVWR.  
WITH  
TIRES  
WITH  
TIRES  
RIMS  
XXXX/XXXXXXX  
XXXX.XX  
XXXX/XXXXXXX  
XXXX.XX  
RIMS  
AT XXX kPa/XX  
PSI COLD  
AT XXX kPa/XX  
PSI COLD  
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR  
VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN  
EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.  
VIN: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
TYPE: XXX  
XXXXX  
XXXXX  
EXT PNT:  
XX  
INT TR  
RC: XX  
AXLE  
XX  
DSO:  
WB BRK  
TP/PS  
R
X
TR SPR  
XXXXX  
XXX  
XXX  
X
XX  
X
XX  
XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX  
XXXX-XXXXXXX-XX  
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification  
Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard  
vehicle handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or  
structural damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of  
control and personal injury.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle  
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.  
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable  
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and  
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.  
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at  
GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional brakes should be used for  
safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the  
towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle.  
The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.  
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a  
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only  
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of  
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel  
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your authorized  
dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your  
authorized dealer) for more detailed information.  
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount  
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.  
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000  
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.  
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply  
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to  
2,875 lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)  
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on  
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.  
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load  
carrying capacities than the original tires because they may  
lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement  
tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase  
the GVWR and GAWR limitations.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could  
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.  
Steps for determining the correct load limit:  
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo  
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.  
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that  
will be riding in your vehicle.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from  
XXX kg or XXX lbs.  
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage  
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and  
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of  
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x  
150) = 650 lb.). In metric units (635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)  
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded  
on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available  
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.  
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be  
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this  
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.  
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available  
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:  
Another example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and  
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load  
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and  
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh  
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 -  
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have  
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and  
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x  
99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.  
A final example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and  
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up  
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio  
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of  
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for  
12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each  
weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (12  
x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enough  
cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the  
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 -  
540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least  
240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then  
the load calculation would be:  
1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you have  
the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In  
metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x  
45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.  
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your  
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross  
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance  
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.  
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and  
utility-type vehicles  
WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation  
of this type of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle  
section in the Driving chapter of this Owner’s Manual.  
WARNING: Loaded vehicles may handle differently than  
unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and  
increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a  
heavily loaded vehicle.  
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.  
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and  
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.  
TRAILER TOWING  
Your vehicle may tow a class I, II or III trailer provided the maximum  
trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed  
for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following charts.  
Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so  
you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle.  
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,  
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these  
components carefully after any towing operation.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
4x2 w/manual transmission  
Engine  
Rear  
axle  
ratio  
Maximum  
GCWR - lb.  
(kg)  
Maximum  
trailer  
Maximum  
frontal area  
weight - lb. of trailer - ft2  
(kg)  
(m2)  
Regular Cab  
4,800 (2,177)  
2.3L  
All  
1,600 (725) Equal to frontal  
area of vehicle  
3.0L*  
3.0L* Dual  
Sport  
3.73  
4.10  
6,000 (2,722) 2,640 (1,197)  
6,000 (2,722) 2,540 (1,152)  
50 (4.64)  
50 (4.64)  
Cab Plus 4  
2.3L  
All  
4,800 (2,177)  
1,440 (653) Equal to frontal  
area of vehicle  
3.0L*  
3.0L* Dual  
Sport  
3.73  
4.10  
6,000 (2,722) 2,540 (1,152)  
6,000 (2,722) 2,320 (1,052)  
50 (4.64)  
50 (4.64)  
4.0L  
4.0L Dual  
Sport  
All  
All  
7,000 (3,175) 3,420 (1,551)  
7,000 (3,175) 3,260 (1,478)  
50 (4.64)  
50 (4.64)  
For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft.  
(300 meters) elevation.  
*When towing on roads with steep grades or moderate but long  
sustained grades (5 miles [8 km] or more), or when ambient  
temperatures exceed 100°F (37°C), vehicle speed should not exceed  
45 mph (72 km/h) in both cases.  
For definition of terms used in this table see Vehicle Loading earlier  
in this chapter.  
To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your particular  
vehicle, see Vehicle Loading earlier in this chapter.  
Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the completed  
towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and the loaded  
trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR).  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
4x4 w/manual transmission  
Engine  
Rear  
axle  
ratio  
Maximum  
GCWR - lb.  
(kg)  
Maximum  
trailer  
Maximum  
frontal area  
weight - lb. of trailer - ft2  
(kg)  
(m2)  
Regular Cab  
3.0L*  
4.0L  
All  
All  
6,000 (2,722) 2,360 (1,070)  
7,000 (3,175) 3,300 (1,496)  
Cab Plus 4  
50 (4.64)  
50 (4.64)  
4.0L  
All  
7,000 (3,175) 3,140 (1,424)  
50 (4.64)  
For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft.  
(300 meters) of elevation.  
*When towing on roads with steep grades or moderate but long  
sustained grades (5 miles [8 km] or more), or when ambient  
temperatures exceed 100°F (37°C), vehicle speed should not exceed  
45 mph (72 km/h) in both cases.  
For definition of terms used in this table, see Vehicle loading earlier in  
this chapter.  
To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your vehicle, see  
Vehicle loading earlier in this chapter.  
Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the completed  
towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and the loaded  
trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR).  
4x2 w/automatic transmission  
Engine  
Rear  
axle  
ratio  
Maximum  
GCWR - lb.  
(kg)  
Maximum  
trailer  
Maximum  
frontal area  
weight - lb. of trailer - ft2  
(kg)  
(m2)  
Regular Cab  
2.3L  
All  
5,500 (2,495) 2,260 (1,025) Equal to frontal  
area of vehicle  
3.0L*  
3.0L* Dual  
Sport  
3.73  
4.10  
6,000 (2,722) 2,600 (1,179)  
6,000 (2,722) 2,400 (1,088)  
50 (4.64)  
50 (4.64)  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
4x2 w/automatic transmission  
Engine  
Rear  
axle  
ratio  
Maximum  
GCWR - lb.  
(kg)  
Maximum  
trailer  
Maximum  
frontal area  
weight - lb. of trailer - ft2  
(kg)  
(m2)  
Cab Plus 4  
5,500 (2,495)  
2.3L  
4.10  
2,100 (953) Equal to frontal  
area of vehicle  
3.0L*  
3.0L* Dual  
Sport  
3.73  
4.10  
6,000 (2,722) 2,440 (1,106)  
6,000 (2,722) 2,280 (1,034)  
50 (4.64)  
50 (4.64)  
4.0L  
4.0L Dual  
Sport  
All  
All  
9,500 (4,309) 5,880 (2,667)  
9,500 (4,309) 5,720 (2,594)  
50 (4.64)  
50 (4.64)  
For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft.  
(300 meters) elevation.  
*When towing on roads with steep grades or moderate but long  
sustained grades (5 miles [8 km] or more), or when ambient  
temperatures exceed 100°F (37°C), vehicle speed should not exceed  
45 mph (72 km/h) in both cases.  
For definition of terms used in this table see Vehicle Loading earlier  
in this chapter.  
To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your particular  
vehicle, see Vehicle loading earlier in this chapter.  
Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the  
completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and  
the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating  
(GCWR).  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
4x4 w/automatic transmission  
Engine  
Rear  
axle  
ratio  
Maximum  
GCWR - lb.  
(kg)  
Maximum  
trailer  
Maximum  
frontal area  
weight - lb. of trailer - ft2  
(kg)  
(m2)  
Regular Cab  
3.0L*  
4.0L  
3.73  
All  
6,000 (2,722) 2,340 (1,061)  
9,500 (4,309) 5,760 (2,612)  
Cab Plus 4  
50 (4.64)  
50 (4.64)  
4.0L  
All  
9,500 (4,309) 5,600 (2,540)  
50 (4.64)  
For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft.  
(300 meters) of elevation.  
*When towing on roads with steep grades or moderate but long  
sustained grades (5 miles [8 km] or more), or when ambient  
temperatures exceed 100°F (37°C), vehicle speed should not exceed  
45 mph (72 km/h) in both cases.  
For definition of terms used in this table, see Vehicle loading earlier in  
this chapter.  
To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your vehicle, see  
Vehicle loading earlier in this chapter.  
Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the  
completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and  
the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating  
(GCWR).  
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on  
the certification label.  
The certification label is found on the driver’s door latch pillar.  
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended  
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could  
result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural  
damage, loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal  
injury.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Preparing to tow  
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is  
properly attached to your vehicle. See your authorized dealer or a  
reliable trailer dealer if you require assistance.  
Hitches  
For towing trailers up to 2,000 lb. (907 kg), use a weight carrying hitch  
and ball which uniformly distributes the trailer tongue loads through the  
underbody structure. Use a frame-mounted weight distributing hitch for  
trailers over 2,000 lb. (907 kg).  
Do not install a single or multi-clamp type bumper hitch, or a hitch  
which attaches to the axle. Underbody mounted hitches are acceptable if  
they are installed properly. Follow the towing instructions of a reputable  
rental agency.  
Whenever a trailer hitch and hardware are removed, make sure all  
mounting holes in the underbody are properly sealed to prevent noxious  
gases or water from entering.  
Safety chains  
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers  
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the  
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.  
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency  
gives to you.  
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.  
Trailer brakes  
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are  
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s  
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal  
regulations.  
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system  
directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not  
have enough braking power and your chances of having a  
collision greatly increase.  
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the  
GVWR not GCWR.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Trailer lamps  
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running  
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. See your  
authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and  
equipment for hooking up trailer lamps.  
Using a step bumper  
The optional step bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and requires  
only a ball with a 3/4 inch (19 mm) shank diameter. The bumper has a  
2,000 lb. (907 kg) trailer weight and 200 lb. (91 kg) tongue weight  
capability.  
The rated capacities (as shown in this guide) for trailer towing with the  
factory bumper are only valid when the trailer hitch ball is installed  
directly into the ball hole in the bumper. Addition of bracketry to either  
lower the ball hitch position or extend the ball hitch rearward will  
significantly increase the loads on the bumper and its attachments. This  
can result in the failure of the bumper or the bumper attachments. Use  
of any type of hitch extensions should be considered abuse.  
Trailer tow connector  
The trailer tow connector is located  
under the rear bumper, on the  
driver’s side of the vehicle.  
1
2
3
4
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Refer to the following chart for information regarding the  
factory-equipped trailer tow connector:  
Trailer tow connector  
Color  
Function  
Comment  
1. Dark Green  
Trailer right-hand  
turn signal  
Circuit activated when brake  
pedal is depressed or when  
ignition is on and right-hand  
turn signal is applied.  
2. Yellow  
Trailer left-hand turn Circuit activated when brake  
signal  
pedal is depressed or when  
ignition is on and left-hand  
turn signal is applied.  
Relay controlled circuit  
activated when the park  
lamps/headlamps are on.  
Matching vehicle circuit  
returns to battery’s negative  
ground.  
3. Tan/White  
4. White  
Tail lamp  
Ground  
Driving while you tow  
When towing a trailer:  
Keep your speed no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) during the first  
500 miles (800 km) of towing a trailer, and don’t make full throttle  
starts.  
Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off  
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.  
Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.  
To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist  
in transmission cooling. (For additional information, refer to the  
Driving with a 5–speed automatic transmission section in the  
Driving chapter.)  
Under extreme conditions with large frontal trailers, high outside  
temperatures and highway speeds, the coolant gauge may indicate  
higher than normal coolant temperatures. If this occurs, reduce speed  
until the coolant temperature returns to the normal range. Refer to  
Engine coolant temperature gauge in the Instrument Cluster  
chapter.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Anticipate stops and brake gradually.  
Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.  
Servicing after towing  
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more  
frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance  
information for more information.  
Trailer towing tips  
Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to  
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make  
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.  
Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.  
The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer  
weight.  
If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly  
conditions, at GCWR, or any combination of these factors, consider  
refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so  
equipped. Refer to the Maintenance and specifications chapter for  
the lubricant specification. Remember that regardless of the rear axle  
lube used, do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km) of a  
new vehicle, and that the first 500 miles (800 km) of towing be done  
at no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) with no full throttle starts.  
After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your  
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.  
To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot  
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park)  
(automatic transmission) or N (Neutral) (manual transmissions).  
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must  
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.  
Launching or retrieving a boat  
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer  
into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the  
trailer is removed from the water.  
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:  
do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of  
the rear bumper.  
do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm) above the  
bottom edge of the rear bumper.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:  
causing internal damage to the components.  
affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.  
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in  
water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed  
unless a leak is suspected or repair required.  
RECREATIONAL TOWING  
Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational towing. An  
example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a  
motorhome. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your  
transmission is not damaged.  
Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission:  
Note: 4x2 and 4x4 vehicles with a manual transmission follow these  
guidelines for recreational towing:  
Before you have your vehicle towed:  
Release the parking brake.  
Move the gearshift to the neutral position.  
Turn the key in the ignition to the OFF/UNLOCKED position.  
The maximum recommended speed is 55 mph (88 km/h).  
The maximum recommended distance is unlimited.  
Put 4x4 switch in 2WD mode (4x4 only)  
The vehicle must be towed in the forward position to ensure no  
damage is done to the internal transmission components.  
For 4x4 vehicles with a manual transmission, it is recommended that a  
Neutral Tow Kit be purchased and installed by an authorized dealer if  
the vehicle is towed frequently.  
In addition, it is recommended that you follow the instructions  
provided by the aftermarket manufacturer of the towing  
apparatus if one has been installed.  
Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission  
4x2 and 4x4 vehicles with an automatic transmission follow these  
guidelines for recreational towing:  
Release the parking brake.  
Turn the key in the ignition to the OFF/UNLOCKED position.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Place the transmission in N (Neutral).  
Do not exceed a distance of 50 miles (80 km).  
Do not exceed 35 mph (56 km/h) vehicle speed.  
Put 4x4 switch in 2WD mode (4x4 only)  
The vehicle must be towed in the forward position to ensure no  
damage is done to the internal transfer case components.  
For 4x4 vehicles with an automatic transmission, a Neutral Tow Kit must  
be purchased and installed by an authorized dealer if a distance of  
50 miles (80 km) or a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h) must be exceeded.  
For 4x2 vehicles with an automatic transmission, if a distance of 50 miles  
(80 km) or a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h) must be exceeded, you must  
disconnect the rear driveshaft. It is recommended that the driveshaft be  
removed/installed only by an authorized dealer. See your authorized  
dealer for driveshaft removal/installation.  
Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause  
transmission fluid or transfer case fluid loss, damage to the  
driveshaft and internal transmission and transfer case  
components.  
CAMPER BODIES  
Your pickup is not recommended for slide–in camper bodies.  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
STARTING  
Positions of the ignition  
1. ACCESSORY, allows the  
electrical accessories such as  
the radio to operate while the  
engine is not running.  
4
3
1
5
2. LOCK, locks the steering wheel,  
automatic transmission gearshift  
lever and allows key removal.  
For vehicles equipped with a  
manual transmission, you must  
depress the ignition release  
lever to release the key.  
2
3. OFF, shuts off the engine and all accessories without locking the  
steering wheel. This position also allows the automatic transmission  
shift lever to be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake  
pedal being depressed.  
WARNING: When the key is in the ignition and in the OFF  
position, the automatic transmission shift lever can be moved  
from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal depressed.  
To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always set the parking  
brake.  
Note: On some vehicles, when the key is in the OFF position, the  
brake-shift interlock feature will prevent the automatic transmission shift  
lever from being moved out of the P (Park) position without the brake  
pedal being depressed.  
4. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key  
position when driving.  
5. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine  
starts.  
Preparing to start your vehicle  
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system.  
Note: This system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment  
standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of  
radio noise.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before  
or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty  
starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to  
Starting the engine in this chapter.  
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce  
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,  
creating the risk of fire or other damage.  
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass  
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the  
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.  
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in  
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open  
the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding  
against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions.  
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle,  
have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive  
if you smell exhaust fumes.  
Important safety precautions  
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If  
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle  
checked.  
Before starting the vehicle:  
1. Make sure all occupants buckle their seat belts. For more  
information on seat belts and their proper usage, refer to the  
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.  
2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
If starting a vehicle with an automatic transmission:  
Make sure the parking brake is  
set.  
Make sure the gearshift is in P  
(Park).  
If starting a vehicle with a manual  
transmission:  
1. Make sure the parking brake is  
set.  
2. Push the clutch pedal to the  
floor.  
3. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without  
turning the key to 5 (START).  
4
3
5
2
1
If there is difficulty in turning the key, firmly rotate the steering wheel  
left and right until the key turns freely. This condition may occur when:  
front wheels are turned  
front wheel is against the curb  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
steering wheel is turned when getting in or out of the vehicle  
Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and  
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information  
regarding the warning lights.  
Starting the engine  
Note: Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as the  
engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter.  
1. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without  
turning the key to 5 (START). If  
4
there is difficulty in turning the  
3
key, rotate the steering wheel  
until the key turns freely. This  
condition may occur when:  
5
2
the front wheels are turned  
a front wheel is against the curb  
1
Turn the key to 5 (START), then  
release the key as soon as the  
engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter.  
Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try,  
turn the key to OFF, wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still  
fails to start, press the accelerator to the floor and try again; this will  
allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is  
flooded with fuel.  
Guarding against exhaust fumes  
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid  
its dangerous effects.  
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle,  
have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive  
if you smell exhaust fumes.  
Important ventilating information  
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of  
time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating  
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)  
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting  
and allows the heater/defroster system to respond quickly. If your vehicle  
is equipped with this system, your equipment includes a heater element  
which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows  
the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt a/c electrical  
source. The block heater system is most effective when outdoor  
temperatures reach below 0°F (-17°C).  
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions  
could result in property damage or physical injury.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use  
your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged  
(cheater) adapters.  
Prior to using the engine block heater, follow these recommendations for  
proper and safe operation:  
For your safety, use an outdoor extension cord that is product  
certified by Underwriter’s laboratory (UL ) or Canadian Standards  
Association (CSA). Use only an extension cord that can be used  
outdoors, in cold temperatures, and is clearly marked ЉSuitable for Use  
with Outdoor Appliances.Љ Never use an indoor extension cord  
outdoors; it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard.  
Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord, minimum.  
Use as short an extension cord as possible.  
Do not use multiple extension cords. Instead, use one extension cord  
which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to  
the outlet without stretching.  
Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition (not  
patched or spliced). Store your extension cord indoors at  
temperatures above 32°F (0°C). Outdoor conditions can deteriorate  
extension cords over a period of time.  
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater with  
ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged (cheater) adapters.  
Also ensure that the block heater, especially the cord, is in good  
condition before use.  
Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug /engine  
block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order  
to prevent possible shock or fire.  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of  
all combustibles such as petroleum products, dust, rags, paper and  
similar items.  
Be sure that the engine block heater, heater cord and extension cord  
are solidly connected. A poor connection can cause the cord to  
become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire. Be sure  
to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system  
has been operating for approximately a half hour.  
Finally, have the engine block heater system checked during your fall  
tune-up to be sure it’s in good working order.  
How to use the engine block heater  
Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. To clean  
them, use a dry cloth.  
Depending on the type of factory installed equipment, your engine block  
heater system may consume anywhere between 400 watts or 1000 watts  
of energy per hour. Your factory installed block heater system does not  
have a thermostat; however, maximum temperature is attained after  
approximately 3 hours of operation. Block heater operation longer than 3  
hours will not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use  
additional electricity.  
Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the  
vehicle. While not in use, make sure the protective cover seals the  
prongs of the engine block heater cord plug.  
BRAKES  
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding  
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out  
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has  
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the  
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.  
Refer to Brake system warning  
!
P
light in the Instrument Cluster  
chapter for information on the brake  
system warning light.  
BRAKE  
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)  
This vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS). A noise  
from the hydraulic pump motor and pulsation in the pedal may be  
observed during ABS braking events and the brake pedal may suddenly  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is done and normal brake  
operation resumes. Pedal pulsation coupled with noise while braking  
under panic conditions or on loose gravel, bumps, wet or snowy roads is  
normal and indicates proper functioning of the vehicle’s anti-lock brake  
system.  
NOTE: The ABS performs a self-check after you start the engine and  
begin to drive away.  
A brief mechanical noise may be heard during this test. This is normal. If  
a malfunction is found, the ABS warning light will come on. If the vehicle  
has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking,  
the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.  
The ABS operates by detecting the  
onset of wheel lockup during brake  
applications and compensates for  
this tendency. The wheels are  
prevented from locking even when  
the brakes are firmly applied. The  
accompanying illustration depicts  
the advantage of an ABS equipped  
vehicle (on bottom) to a non-ABS  
equipped vehicle (on top) during hard braking with loss of front braking  
traction.  
WARNING: The Anti-Lock system does not decrease the time  
necessary to apply the brakes or always reduce stopping  
distance. Always leave enough room between your vehicle and  
the vehicle in front of you to stop.  
Using ABS  
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake  
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the  
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping  
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain  
steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces. However,  
the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
ABS warning lamp  
The ABS lamp in the instrument  
cluster momentarily illuminates  
ABS  
when the ignition is turned on. If  
the light does not illuminate during  
start up, remains on or flashes, the  
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.  
Even when the ABS is disabled,  
normal braking is still effective. (If  
your BRAKE warning lamp  
!
P
BRAKE  
illuminates with the parking brake  
released, have your brake system  
serviced immediately by an authorized dealer.)  
Parking brake  
Apply the parking brake whenever  
the vehicle is parked. To set the  
parking brake, press the parking  
brake pedal down until the pedal  
stops.  
The BRAKE warning lamp in the  
instrument cluster illuminates and  
remains illuminated (when the  
ignition is turned ON) until the  
parking brake is released.  
!
P
BRAKE  
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure  
that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic  
transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission).  
Note: The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.  
However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop  
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the  
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected.  
Pull the release lever to release the  
brake.  
Driving with the parking brake  
on will cause the brakes to wear  
out quickly and reduce fuel  
economy.  
STEERING  
Your vehicle is equipped with power steering. Power steering uses energy  
from the engine to decrease the driver’s effort in steering the vehicle.  
To help prevent damage to the power steering pump:  
Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or the extreme left  
for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.  
Do not operate the vehicle with the power steering pump fluid level  
below the MIN mark on the reservoir.  
Some noise is normal during operation. If the noise is excessive, check  
for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your  
authorized dealer.  
Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering  
pump fluid level. Check for low power steering pump fluid level before  
seeking service by your authorized dealer.  
Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on  
the reservoir, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.  
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned  
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.  
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:  
Underinflated tire(s) on any wheel(s)  
Uneven vehicle loading  
High crown in center of road  
High crosswinds  
Wheels out of alignment  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Loose or worn suspension components  
TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)  
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when  
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the  
Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. The axle may  
exhibit a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed.  
This is normal behavior and indicates the axle is working.  
PREPARING TO DRIVE  
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover  
rate than other types of vehicles.  
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is  
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat  
belt.  
Utility vehicles and trucks have larger tires and increased ground  
clearance, giving the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger  
car.  
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as  
utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than vehicles with  
a lower center of gravity. Utility vehicles and trucks are not  
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any  
more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform  
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns,  
excessive speed or abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure  
to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of  
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.  
WARNING: Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity,  
may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Do not overload  
your vehicle and use extra precautions, such as driving at  
slower speeds, avoiding abrupt steering changes and allowing  
for increased stopping distance, when driving a heavily loaded  
vehicle. Over loading or loading the vehicle improperly can  
deteriorate handling capability and contribute to loss of vehicle  
control and vehicle rollover.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)  
Brake-shift interlock  
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents  
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is  
in the ON position unless the brake pedal is depressed.  
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in  
the ON position and the brake pedal depressed:  
1. Apply the parking brake, turn ignition key to LOCK, then remove the  
key.  
2. Insert the key and turn it to OFF. Apply the brake pedal and shift  
to N (Neutral).  
WARNING: When the key is in the ignition and in the OFF  
position, the automatic transmission shift lever can be moved  
from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal depressed.  
To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always set the parking  
brake.  
Note: On some vehicles, when the key is in the OFF position, the  
brake-shift interlock feature will prevent the automatic transmission shift  
lever from being moved out of the P (Park) position without the brake  
pedal being depressed.  
3. Start the vehicle.  
If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,  
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not  
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside  
Emergencies chapter.  
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the  
brakelamps are working.  
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure  
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the  
LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your  
vehicle.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake  
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be  
working properly. See your authorized dealer.  
Driving with a 5–speed automatic transmission (if equipped)  
This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy.  
Adaptive Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and  
shift quality. When the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected for any  
type of service or repair, the transmission will need to relearn the normal  
shift strategy parameters, much like having to reset your radio stations  
when your vehicle battery has been disconnected. The Adaptive  
Transmission Strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating  
parameters. This learning process could take several transmission  
upshifts and downshifts; during this learning process, slightly firmer  
shifts may occur. After this learning process, normal shift feel and shift  
scheduling will resume.  
WARNING: Hold the brake pedal down while you move the  
gearshift lever from P (Park) to another position. If you do not  
hold the brake pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly  
and injure someone.  
P (Park)  
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from  
turning.  
To put your vehicle in gear:  
Start the engine  
Depress the brake pedal  
Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear  
To put your vehicle in P (Park):  
Come to a complete stop  
Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure  
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the  
LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your  
vehicle.  
R (Reverse)  
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.  
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R  
(Reverse).  
N (Neutral)  
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is  
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.  
(Overdrive)  
The normal driving position for the  
best fuel economy. Transmission  
operates in gears one through  
O/D  
ON/OFF  
five.  
(Overdrive) can be  
deactivated by pressing the  
transmission control switch on the end of the gearshift lever.  
This will illuminate the O/D OFF  
lamp and activate Drive.  
O/D  
OFF  
Drive (not shown)  
Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed.  
This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive.  
O/D OFF lamp is illuminated.  
Provides engine braking.  
Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to  
other gears. Examples: city traffic, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer  
towing and when engine braking is required.  
To return to O/D (overdrive mode), press the transmission control  
switch. The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated.  
O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned  
off.  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
2 (Second)  
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional  
engine braking on downgrades.  
1 (First)  
Provides maximum engine braking.  
Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.  
Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)  
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.  
Forced downshifts  
Allowed in  
(Overdrive) or Drive.  
Depress the accelerator to the floor.  
Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.  
MANUAL TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)  
1
2
3
4
5
R
Using the clutch  
The manual transmission has a starter interlock that prevents cranking  
the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed.  
To start the vehicle:  
1. Make sure the parking brake is fully set.  
2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor, then put the gearshift lever in the  
neutral position.  
3. Start the engine.  
4. Press the brake pedal and move the gearshift lever to the desired  
gear; 1 (First) or R (Reverse).  
5. Release the parking brake, then slowly release the clutch pedal while  
slowly pressing on the accelerator.  
During each shift, the clutch pedal must be fully depressed to the floor.  
Make sure the floor mat is properly positioned so it doesn’t interfere with  
the full extension of the clutch pedal.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Failure to fully depress the clutch pedal to the floor may cause  
increased shift efforts, prematurely wear transmission  
components or damage the transmission.  
Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the  
clutch pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a  
hill. These actions will reduce the life of the clutch.  
Recommended shift speeds  
Downshift according to the following charts for your specific  
engine/drivetrain combination:  
Upshifts  
Transfer case position (if equipped)  
Shift from:  
2WD and 4H  
4L  
1 -2  
2 - 3  
10 mph (16 km/h)  
19 mph (26 km/h)  
4 mph (6 km/h)  
8 mph (10 km/h)  
3 - 4  
4 - 5 (Overdrive)  
28 mph (43 km/h) 12 mph (16 km/h)  
40 mph (68 km/h) 16 mph (26 km/h)  
Maximum downshift speeds  
Transfer case position (if equipped)  
2WD and 4H 4L  
Shift from:  
5 (Overdrive) - 4  
55 mph (88 km/h) 22 mph (34 km/h)  
45 mph (72 km/h) 18 mph (27 km/h)  
35 mph (56 km/h) 14 mph (21 km/h)  
4 - 3  
3 - 2  
2 - 1  
20 mph (32 km/h)  
8 mph (11 km/h)  
Reverse  
1. Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stop before you shift  
into R (Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the transmission.  
2. Move the gearshift lever into the neutral position and wait at least  
three seconds before shifting into R (Reverse).  
The gearshift lever can only be moved into R (Reverse) by moving it  
from left of 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth) before shifting into R (Reverse).  
This is a lockout feature that protects the transmission from  
accidentally being shifted into R (Reverse) from 5 (Overdrive).  
Parking your vehicle  
1. Apply the brake and shift into the neutral position.  
2. Fully apply the parking brake, then shift into 1 (First).  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
3. Turn the ignition off.  
WARNING: Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move  
unexpectedly and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set  
the parking brake fully.  
Removing the key  
Turn the ignition off, push the  
release lever (located above the  
ignition), then turn the key toward  
you and remove the key.  
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow  
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by  
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a  
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.  
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating  
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.  
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the  
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.  
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)  
WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation  
of this type of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in  
this chapter.  
Four–wheel drive (4WD) supplies power to all four wheels. 4WD should  
not be operated on dry pavement; driveline damage may occur.  
If equipped with the Electronic Shift 4WD System, and 4WD Low  
is selected while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h), the  
4WD system will not engage. This is normal and should be no  
reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4WD Low for proper  
operation.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
4WD system indicator lights  
4x4 - Momentarily illuminates  
when the vehicle is started.  
Illuminates when 4H (4WD High)  
is engaged.  
4x4  
4x4 LOW – Momentarily  
illuminates when the vehicle is  
started. Illuminates when 4L  
(4WD Low) is engaged.  
4x4  
LOW  
Using the electronic shift 4WD system  
4H  
2H  
4L  
2H (2WD High) - Power to the rear wheels only; used for street and  
highway driving.  
4H (4WD High) - Used for extra traction such as in snow or icy roads  
or in off-road situations. Not intended for use on dry pavement.  
4L (4WD Low) - Uses extra gearing to provide maximum power to all  
four wheels. Intended only for off-road applications such as deep sand,  
steep grades or pulling heavy objects. 4L (4WD Low) will not engage  
while the vehicle is moving; this is normal and should be no reason for  
concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4L (4WD Low) for proper operation.  
Shifting between 2H (2WD High) and 4H (4WD High)  
Move the 4WD control between 2H and 4H at a stop or any forward  
speed.  
Note: Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping.  
Shifting to/from 4L (4WD Low)  
Note: Some noise may be heard as the 4WD system shifts or engages.  
This is normal and should be no reason for concern.  
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
2. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, place the  
transmission in N (Neutral); on vehicles equipped with a manual  
transmission, depress the clutch.  
3. Move the 4WD control to the desired position.  
If shifting into 4L (4WD Low), wait for the 4WD LOW light in the  
instrument cluster to turn on indicating the shift is complete.  
If shifting out of 4L (4WD Low), wait for the 4WD LOW light in the  
instrument cluster to turn off indicating the shift is complete.  
Driving off-road with 4WD  
Your vehicle is specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and  
rough terrain and has operating characteristics that are somewhat  
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.  
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles  
Trucks and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your  
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without  
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.  
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle  
differently than an ordinary passenger car.  
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.  
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel  
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not  
grip the spokes.  
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as  
rocks and stumps.  
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before  
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain  
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four  
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.  
Basic operating principles  
Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce  
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components.  
4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose  
surfaces.  
Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering  
characteristics of your vehicle.  
Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by  
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement  
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but  
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the  
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering  
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.  
It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow  
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose  
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too  
sharply or abruptly.  
It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway  
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a  
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide  
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the  
safety of others should be your primary concern.  
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as  
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than  
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel  
drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high  
as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are  
designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions.  
Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in  
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an  
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,  
personal injury and death.  
If your vehicle gets stuck  
If the vehicle is stuck it may be rocked out by shifting from forward and  
reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press lightly  
on the accelerator in each gear.  
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating  
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.  
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage  
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may  
overheat.  
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).  
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Emergency maneuvers  
In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn  
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e.,  
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid  
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,  
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or  
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are  
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could  
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover  
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the  
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.  
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not  
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.  
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as  
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than  
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel  
drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high  
as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are  
designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions.  
Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in  
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an  
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,  
personal injury and death.  
If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from  
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle  
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,  
avoid these abrupt inputs.  
Sand  
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid  
area of the trail. Do not reduce the tire pressures but shift to a lower  
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly  
and avoid spinning the wheels.  
Note: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator light may  
illuminate depending on how much air is released from your tires and/or  
how long you drive the vehicle under these conditions  
Mud and water  
If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake  
capability may be limited.  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher  
than the bottom of the hubs (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the  
ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall.  
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the  
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving  
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.  
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to the driveshafts and  
tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an  
imbalance that could damage drive components.  
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water,  
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.  
Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is  
submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause  
internal transmission damage.  
Replace rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in  
water. The rear axle does not normally require a lubricant change for the  
life of the vehicle. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or  
changed unless a leak is suspected or repair is required.  
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain  
When driving on a hill, avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep  
slopes. You could lose traction and slip sideways. Drive straight up,  
straight down or avoid the hill completely. Know the conditions on the  
other side of a hill before driving over the crest.  
When climbing a steep hill, start in a lower gear rather than downshifting  
to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started. This  
reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling.  
When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden braking. Shift to a lower gear  
when added engine braking is desired.  
When speed control is on and you are driving uphill, your vehicle speed  
may drop considerably, especially if you are carrying a heavy load.  
If vehicle speed drops more than 10 mph (16 km/h), the speed control  
will cancel automatically. Resume speed with accelerator pedal.  
If speed control cancels after climbing the hill, reset speed by pressing  
and holding the SET ACCEL button (to resume speeds over 30 mph  
[50 km/h]).  
Automatic transmissions may shift frequently while driving up steep  
grades. Eliminate frequent shifting by shifting out of  
a lower gear.  
(Overdrive) into  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Driving on snow and ice  
A 4WD vehicle has advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but  
can skid like any other vehicle.  
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on  
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting  
from a full stop.  
When braking, apply the brakes as you normally would. In order to allow  
the anti-lock brake system (ABS) to operate properly, keep steady  
pressure on the brake pedal.  
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles  
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower  
gears.  
DRIVING THROUGH WATER  
If driving through deep or standing  
water is unavoidable, proceed very  
slowly especially when the depth is  
not known. Never drive through  
water that is higher than the bottom  
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the  
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).  
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.  
Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your  
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where  
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the  
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.  
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your  
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.  
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL  
The hazard flasher is located on the  
steering column, just behind the  
steering wheel. The hazard flashers  
will operate when the ignition is in  
any position or if the key is not in  
the ignition.  
Push in the flasher control and all  
front and rear direction signals will  
flash. Press the flasher control again  
to turn them off. Use it when your  
vehicle is disabled and is creating a  
safety hazard for other motorists.  
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.  
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH  
This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine  
when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.  
After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch  
may have been activated.  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
The fuel pump shut-off switch is  
located on the right side of the  
passenger footwell, behind the fuse  
panel door.  
To reset the switch:  
1. Turn the ignition OFF.  
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.  
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset  
the switch by pushing in on the  
reset button.  
4. Turn the ignition ON.  
5. Wait a few seconds and return  
the key to OFF.  
6. Make another check for leaks.  
FUSES AND RELAYS  
Fuses  
If electrical components in the  
vehicle are not working, a fuse may  
have blown. Blown fuses are  
identified by a broken wire within  
the fuse. Check the appropriate  
fuses before replacing any electrical  
components.  
15  
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage  
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire  
damage and could start a fire.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Standard fuse amperage rating and color  
COLOR  
Cartridge  
maxi  
fuses  
Fuse  
rating  
Mini  
fuses  
Standard  
fuses  
Maxi  
fuses  
Fuse link  
cartridge  
2A  
3A  
4A  
Grey  
Violet  
Pink  
Tan  
Grey  
Violet  
Pink  
Tan  
5A  
7.5A  
10A  
15A  
20A  
25A  
30A  
40A  
50A  
60A  
70A  
80A  
Brown  
Red  
Brown  
Red  
Yellow  
Green  
Orange  
Red  
Blue  
Tan  
Natural  
Blue  
Pink  
Green  
Red  
Yellow  
Blue  
Pink  
Green  
Red  
Yellow  
Brown  
Black  
Blue  
Yellow  
Natural  
Green  
Blue  
Yellow  
Natural  
Green  
Black  
Passenger compartment fuse panel  
The fuse panel is located under the  
right-hand side of the instrument  
panel behind the kick panel. A fuse  
puller tool is located near the lower  
right corner of the fuse box; this  
tool will assist you in pulling the  
fuses out for inspection, if  
necessary.  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
The fuses are coded as follows:  
Fuse/Relay  
Fuse Amp Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel  
Location  
Rating  
5A  
10A  
10A  
10A  
5A  
Description  
Instrument panel dimmer switch  
Trailer tow park lamps  
Right low beam headlamp  
Left low beam headlamp  
Windshield wiper module (RUN/ACCY)  
Radio (RUN/ACCY), Door switch  
illumination  
1
2
3
4
5
6
10A  
7
8
5A  
10A  
Not used (spare)  
Restraints Control Module (RCM), PADI  
(Passenger Air bag Deactivation  
Indicator), Occupant Classification  
Sensor (OCS)  
9
5A  
Cluster air bag indicator  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
10  
Fuse Amp Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel  
Rating  
Description  
Cluster (RUN/START), 4x4 module  
(RUN/START)  
10A  
11  
12  
10A  
15A  
Smart Junction Box (SJB) (Logic  
power)  
Audiophile subwoofer amplifier,  
Satellite radio  
13  
14  
15A  
15A  
Horn, Interior lamps  
High beam headlamp, High beam  
indicator (cluster)  
15  
16  
Not used  
30A cartridge Power windows  
fuse  
17  
18  
19  
15A  
20A  
Turn signals/Hazards  
Not used  
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp  
(CHMSL)/Stop lamps  
20  
10A  
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module,  
Speed control module, Back-up lamps,  
Overdrive cancel switch, Electronic  
flasher (turn/hazard)  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
5A  
5A  
30A  
20A  
Starter relay coil  
Radio (START)  
Headlamps (low and high beam)  
Radio battery feed (B+)  
Accessory relay (power windows)  
Redundant cruise switch  
Climate control blower relay/blend  
doors  
2A  
10A  
28  
29  
15A  
20A  
4x4 module battery feed (B+)  
Cigar lighter, Diagnostic connector  
(OBD II)  
30  
5A  
Power mirrors  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
31  
Fuse Amp Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel  
Rating  
Description  
Front park lamps, Rear park lamps,  
License plate lamps, Dimmer switch,  
Trailer tow park lamps  
Brake switch (logic), Brake-shift  
interlock  
20A  
32  
5A  
33  
34  
35  
5A  
20A  
15A  
Instrument cluster battery feed (B+)  
Power point  
Power locks  
Power distribution box  
The power distribution box is  
located in the engine compartment.  
The power distribution box contains  
high-current fuses that protect your  
vehicle’s main electrical systems  
from overloads.  
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing  
fuses.  
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace  
the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting  
the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.  
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the  
Battery section of the Maintenance and specifications chapter.  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
2.3L engine (if equipped)  
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:  
Fuse/Relay  
Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box Description  
Location  
Rating  
40A**  
1
2
Passenger compartment fuse panel  
Not used  
3
4
40A**  
Passenger compartment fuse panel  
Not used  
5
6
50A**  
Passenger compartment fuse panel  
Not used  
7
8
30A**  
Starter solenoid  
Not used  
9
40A**  
30A**  
30A**  
Ignition switch  
Not used  
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) relay  
Not used  
Blower motor (climate control)  
Not used  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box Description  
Rating  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
40A**  
20A**  
10A*  
Not used  
Not used  
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module  
Not used  
Engine fan  
Not used  
PCM keep alive power, Canister purge  
valve solenoid  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
30A*  
10A*  
30A*  
30A*  
Not used  
Fuel pump motor, Fuel injectors  
Not used  
A/C clutch solenoid  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Wipers/washer  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Trailer tow (right turn)  
PCM power  
Not used  
Automatic transmission  
Trailer tow (left turn)  
Engine fan relay coil, A/C relay, Engine  
sensors, VMV solenoid  
7.5A*  
15A*  
10A*  
7.5A*  
20A*  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box Description  
Location  
Rating  
15A*  
44  
Ignition coil, Capacitor  
Not used  
Not used  
Fuel pump relay, Fuel injectors relay  
Not used  
45A  
45B  
46A  
46B  
47  
Engine fan relay  
Starter relay  
Not used  
48  
49  
50  
Not used  
51  
Not used  
52  
Not used  
53  
Not used  
54  
PCM relay  
55  
56A  
56B  
Blower relay  
A/C clutch solenoid relay  
Not used  
* Mini Fuses ** Maxi Fuses  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
3.0L and 4.0L engines (if equipped)  
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:  
Fuse/Relay  
Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box Description  
Location  
Rating  
40A**  
1
2
Passenger compartment fuse panel  
Not used  
3
4
40A**  
Passenger compartment fuse panel  
Not used  
5
6
50A**  
Passenger compartment fuse panel  
Not used  
7
8
30A**  
Starter solenoid  
Not used  
9
10  
11  
40A**  
30A**  
Ignition switch  
Not used  
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) relay  
fuse  
12  
13  
14  
30A**  
Not used  
Blower motor (climate control)  
Not used  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box Description  
Location  
Rating  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
40A**  
Not used  
Not used  
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module  
Not used  
Not used  
10A*  
Not used  
PCM keep alive power, Canister purge  
valve solenoid  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
30A*  
10A*  
20A*  
30A*  
15A*  
30A*  
Not used  
Fuel pump motor, Fuel injectors  
Not used  
A/C clutch solenoid  
Not used  
4x4 module  
Not used  
Wipers/washer  
Not used  
Foglamps  
Not used  
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Trailer tow (right turn)  
PCM power  
Not used  
Automatic transmission  
Trailer tow (left turn)  
A/C relay coil, Engine sensors, VMV  
solenoid, EGR solenoid, Heated PCV  
7.5A*  
15A*  
10A*  
7.5A*  
20A*  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box Description  
Rating  
44  
15A*  
Ignition coil, Capacitor  
Not used  
Not used  
A/C clutch solenoid  
Not used  
PCM relay  
Fuel pump relay, Fuel injectors relay  
Fog lamp relay  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
45A  
45B  
46A  
46B  
47  
48A  
48B  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
Not used  
Blower relay  
Starter relay  
56  
* Mini Fuses ** Maxi Fuses  
CHANGING THE TIRES  
If you get a flat tire while driving:  
do not brake heavily.  
gradually decrease the vehicle’s speed.  
hold the steering wheel firmly.  
slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.  
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will  
illuminate when the spare is in use. To restore the full functionality of  
the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure  
monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.  
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage  
to the TPMS sensor, refer to Changing tires with TPMS in the Tires,  
Wheels and Loading chapter. Replace the spare tire with a road tire as  
soon as possible.  
WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire  
Pressure Monitoring System and should not be used.  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
WARNING: Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)  
in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for important  
information. If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes  
damaged, it will no longer function.  
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information  
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an  
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.  
If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for  
temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should  
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size  
and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by  
Mazda. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be  
replaced rather than repaired.  
A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that  
is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels  
and can be one of three types:  
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire  
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall  
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire  
has a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR  
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”  
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:  
Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)  
Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the  
Safety Compliance Label  
Tow a trailer  
Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare  
tire  
Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time  
Use commercial car washing equipment  
Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire  
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel  
location can lead to impairment of the following:  
Handling, stability and braking performance  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Comfort and noise  
Ground clearance and parking at curbs  
Winter weather driving capability  
Wet weather driving capability  
For vehicles equipped with 4WD, it is not recommended that the vehicle  
be operated in 4WD modes with a temporary emergency spare tire. If  
4WD operation is necessary, do not operate above speeds of 10 mph  
(16 km/h) or for distances above 50 miles (80 km).  
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel  
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:  
Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)  
Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time  
Use commercial car washing equipment  
Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare  
tire/wheel  
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to  
impairment of the following:  
Handling, stability and braking performance  
Comfort and noise  
Ground clearance and parking at curbs  
Winter weather driving capability  
Wet weather driving capability  
All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)  
Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)  
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional  
caution should be given to:  
Towing a trailer  
Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body  
Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack  
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and  
seek service as soon as possible.  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Stopping and securing the vehicle  
1. Park on a level surface, activate  
hazard flashers and place  
gearshift lever in P (Park)  
(automatic transmission) or 1  
(First) (manual transmission).  
2. Set the parking brake and turn  
engine OFF.  
Location of the spare tire and tools  
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will  
illuminate when the spare is in use. To restore the full functionality of  
the TPMS system, all road wheels equipped with the tire pressure  
monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.  
Have a flat tire serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent  
damage to the TPMS sensor, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System  
(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheel and Loading chapter. Replace the spare  
tire with a road tire as soon as possible.  
The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following  
locations:  
Tool  
Spare tire  
Location  
Under the vehicle, just forward of the rear  
bumper  
Jack, jack handle, Regular Cab: behind seats and underneath the  
wheel nut wrench jack and tools cover  
Cab Plus 4–Door: stowed behind the front seats,  
between jump seats and underneath jack and  
tools cover. The lug wrench is held in place with  
a wingnut.  
Key, spare tire lock In the glove box  
(if equipped)  
Removing the spare tire  
1. Assemble the jack handle to the lug wrench as shown in the  
illustrations.  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
When connecting the jack handle, assemble the following:  
one handle extension and one  
typical extension. To assemble,  
slide parts together. To  
disconnect, depress button and  
pull apart.  
one wheel nut wrench. Depress  
button and slide together.  
2. If equipped, unlock and remove  
the spare tire carrier lock from  
the rear access hole located just  
above the rear bumper and  
below the tailgate.  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
3. Insert the square end of the  
jack handle into the rear access  
hole located just above the rear  
bumper and below the tailgate.  
Forward motion will stop and  
resistance to turning will be felt  
when properly engaged.  
4. Turn the handle  
counterclockwise until tire is  
lowered to the ground and the  
cable is slightly slack.  
5. Remove the retainer from the  
spare tire.  
Tire change procedure  
WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the  
transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or  
slipping off the jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park)  
(automatic transmission) or R (Reverse) (manual  
transmission).  
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you  
change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in  
both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other  
side and end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.  
WARNING: If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone  
else could be seriously injured.  
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the  
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to  
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or  
changing the wheel.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
1. Block the diagonally opposite  
wheel.  
2. Insert tapered end of the lug  
wrench behind hub caps and  
twist them off.  
3. Loosen each wheel lug nut  
one-half turn counterclockwise  
but do not remove them until  
the wheel is raised off the  
ground.  
4. Position the jack according to  
the following guides and turn  
the jack handle clockwise until the tire is a maximum of 1 inch  
(25 mm) off the ground.  
WARNING: To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any  
part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do  
not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack  
is only meant for changing the tire.  
WARNING: Do not let anyone stay in the vehicle when you are  
using the jack; have them stand in a safe place out of traffic  
lanes.  
Front  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Rear  
Never use the differential as a  
jacking point. It is too easy for  
the vehicle to tilt or fall and you  
can be injured.  
5. Remove the wheel lug nuts with  
the lug wrench.  
6. Replace the flat tire with the  
spare tire, making sure the valve  
stem is facing outward. Reinstall  
the lug nuts until the wheel is  
snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the  
wheel has been lowered.  
7. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.  
8. Remove the jack and fully  
tighten the lug nuts, in the  
order shown. Refer to Wheel  
lug nut torque specifications  
later in this chapter for the  
proper lug nut torque  
1
3
4
specification.  
9. Stow the flat tire. Refer to  
5
2
Stowing the spare tire.  
10. Stow the jack and lug wrench.  
Make sure the jack is fastened so it does not rattle when you drive.  
11. Unblock the wheels.  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Stowing the flat/spare tire  
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in  
failure of cable or loss of spare tire.  
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing up.  
2. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the wire and  
retainer through the center of the wheel.  
3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its original  
position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle  
increases significantly as the tire contacts the frame. The spare tire  
carrier will ratchet when the tire is in the fully stowed position. The  
spare tire carrier has a built-in ratchet feature that will not allow you  
to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier ratchets with very little effort,  
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer for assistance at your  
earliest convenience.  
4. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame assembly. Push against  
the tire to make sure it is tightly seated under the vehicle. Loosen  
and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the spare tire  
may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the spare tire.  
5. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire  
pressure (every six months, per Service Maintenance Section), or  
at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other  
components.  
6. Install the spare tire lock (if equipped) into the access hole above the  
rear bumper with the spare tire lock key (if equipped) and jack handle.  
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS  
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 km)  
after any wheel disturbance (rotation, flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).  
Lug nut socket size/Bolt  
size  
Wheel lug nut torque*  
lb.ft.  
Nm  
3
Lug nut socket size: 4 inch  
100  
135  
(19 mm) hex  
1
Bolt size: 2 x 20  
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and  
rust. Use only Mazda recommended replacement fasteners.  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any  
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting  
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake  
drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any  
fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they  
do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel.  
Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the  
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen  
and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion,  
resulting in loss of control.  
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole  
prior to installation. If there is  
visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole,  
remove loose particles by wiping  
with clean rag and apply grease.  
Apply grease only to the wheel pilot  
hole surface by smearing a “dime”  
(1 square cm) sized glob of grease  
around the wheel pilot surface (1)  
with end of finger. DO NOT apply  
grease to lugnut/stud holes or  
wheel-to-brake surfaces.  
OVERHEATING  
If the temperature gauge indicates overheating and you experience  
power loss, you hear a loud knocking or pinging noise, the engine is  
probably too hot.  
If this happens:  
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way.  
2. Shift the automatic transmission into P (Park) or the manual  
transmission into the neutral position, and apply the parking brake.  
3. Turn off the air conditioner.  
WARNING: Steam from an overheated engine is dangerous. The  
escaping steam could seriously burn you. Open the hood ONLY  
after steam is no longer escaping from the engine.  
4. Check whether coolant or steam is escaping from under the hood or  
from the engine compartment.  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
If steam is coming from the engine compartment: do not go near  
the front of the vehicle. Stop the engine, then turn the ignition switch  
to the ON position without starting the engine. The radiator cooling  
fans will start to cool the engine.  
If neither coolant nor steam is escaping: open the hood and idle  
the engine until it cools. If this does not lower the temperature, stop  
the engine and let it cool.  
5. Check the coolant level. If it is low, look for leaks in the radiator  
hoses and connections, heater hoses and connections, radiator and  
water pump.  
If you find a leak or other damage, or if coolant is still leaking, stop the  
engine and call an authorized dealer.  
WARNING: When the engine and radiator are hot, scalding  
coolant and steam may shoot out under pressure and cause  
serious injury. Do not remove the cooling system cap when the  
engine and radiator are hot.  
See Adding coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications section. If  
you find no problems, the engine is cool and no leaks are obvious,  
carefully add coolant as required.  
Note: If the engine continues to overheat or frequently overheats, have  
the cooling system inspected. The engine could be seriously damaged  
unless repairs are made.  
JUMP STARTING  
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if  
exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could  
result in injury or vehicle damage.  
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,  
eyes and clothing, if contacted.  
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission  
vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start  
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic  
transmission may cause transmission damage.  
Preparing your vehicle  
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the  
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is  
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the  
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update  
transmission operation.  
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.  
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could  
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.  
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle  
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on  
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other  
moving parts.  
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion  
before you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight  
and level.  
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical  
surges. Turn all other accessories off.  
Connecting the jumper cables  
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of  
the discharged battery.  
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the  
assisting (boosting) battery.  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)  
terminal of the assisting battery.  
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the  
assisting battery.  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed  
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and  
the fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker covers  
or the intake manifold as grounding points.  
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the  
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may  
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.  
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of  
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.  
Jump starting  
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at  
moderately increased speed.  
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.  
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an  
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Removing the jumper cables  
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were  
connected.  
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.  
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the  
assisting (boosting) battery.  
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the  
booster vehicle’s battery.  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the  
booster vehicle’s battery.  
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the  
disabled vehicle’s battery.  
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables  
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can  
relearn its idle conditions.  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
WRECKER TOWING  
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing  
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your  
roadside assistance service provider.  
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed  
equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Mazda has not approved a  
slingbelt towing procedure.  
On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front  
wheels on the ground and the rear wheels off the ground.  
On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a  
wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the  
ground.  
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle  
damage may occur.  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE (U.S.A. MAINLAND AND HAWAII)  
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to  
serve you. All Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the  
tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition.  
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement  
regarding the service of your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Authorized  
Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take the following  
steps:  
STEP 1: Contact Your Authorized Mazda Dealer  
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest  
and best way to address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved  
by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS  
MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of the  
authorized dealer or the OWNER.  
STEP 2: Contact Mazda North American Operations  
If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting  
your authorized dealer management, you can reach Mazda North  
American Operations by one of the following ways:  
Log on at: www.mazdaUSA.com.  
Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local  
Authorized Mazda Dealership in the U.S., can be found here.  
By email at: www.mazdaUSA.com (Click on CONTACT US at the bottom  
of the home page).  
By phone at: 1 (800) 222-5500  
By letter at:  
Attn: Customer Assistance  
Mazda North American Operations  
7755 Irvine Center Drive  
Irvine, CA 92618–2922  
P.O. Box 19734  
Irvine, CA 92623–9734  
Whatever way you contact us, please help us to serve you more  
efficiently and effectively by providing the following information:  
1. Your name, address, and telephone number  
2. Year and model of vehicle  
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration  
or title or located on the upper driver’s side corner of the dash)  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
4. Purchase date and current mileage  
5. Your authorized dealer’s name and location  
6. Your question(s)  
If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda  
Distributor.  
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE (CANADA)  
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to  
serve you. All Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the  
tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition.  
In our experience, any questions, problems or complaints regarding the  
operation of your Mazda or any other general service transactions are  
most effectively resolved by your authorized dealer. If the cause of your  
dissatisfaction cannot adequately be addressed by normal authorized  
dealer procedures, we recommend that you take the following steps:  
STEP 1: Contact Your Authorized Mazda Dealer  
Discuss the matter with a member of authorized dealer management. If  
the Service Manager has already reviewed your concerns, contact the  
owner of the authorized dealer or its General Manager.  
STEP 2: Call the Mazda Regional Office  
If you feel that you still require assistance, ask the authorized dealer  
Service Manager to arrange for you to meet the local Mazda Service  
Representative. If more expedient, contact Mazda Canada Inc. Regional  
Office nearest you for such arrangements.  
STEP 3: Contact the Mazda Customer Relations Department  
If still not substantially satisfied, contact the Customer Relations  
Department, Mazda Canada Inc., 55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill, Ontario  
L4B 3K5 Canada TEL: 1 (800) 263–4680.  
Provide the Department with the following information:  
1. Your name, address, and telephone number  
2. Year and model of vehicle  
3. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Refer to Vehicle identification  
label in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter of this manual  
for the location of the VIN.  
4. Purchase date.  
5. Present odometer reading.  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
6. Your authorized dealer’s name and location  
7. The nature of your problem and/or cause of dissatisfaction.  
The Department, in cooperation with the local Mazda Service  
Representative, will review the case to determine if everything possible  
has been done to ensure your satisfaction.  
Please recognize that the resolution of service problems in most cases  
requires the use of your authorized dealer’s service facilities, personnel  
and equipment. We urge you to follow the above three steps in sequence  
therefore for most effective results.  
Mediation/Arbitration Program  
Occasionally a customer concern cannot be resolved through Mazda’s  
Customer Satisfaction Program. If after exhausting procedures in this  
manual, your concern is still not resolved, you have another option.  
Mazda Canada Inc. participates in an arbitration program administered  
by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). CAMVAP will  
advise you about how your concern may be reviewed and resolved by an  
independent third party through binding arbitration.  
Your complete satisfaction is the goal of Mazda Canada Inc. and our  
authorized dealers. Mazda’s participation in CAMVAP makes a valuable  
contribution to our achieving that goal. There is no charge for using  
CAMVAP. CAMVAP results are fast, fair and final as the award is binding  
on both you and Mazda Canada Inc.  
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP)  
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealerships. If a specific  
item of concern arises, where a solution cannot be reached between an  
owner, Mazda, and/or one of it’s authorized dealers (that all parties  
cannot agree upon), the owner may wish to use the services offered by  
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).  
CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators to assist  
consumers in scheduling and preparing for their arbitration hearings.  
However, before you can proceed with CAMVAP you must follow your  
Mazda dispute resolution process as outlined previously.  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
CAMVAP is fully implemented in all provinces and territories. Consumers  
wishing to obtain further information about the Program can obtain an  
information booklet from their authorized dealer, the Provincial  
Administrator at 1 (800) 207-0685, or by contacting the Canadian Motor  
Vehicle Arbitration Office At:  
235 Yorkland Boulevard, Suite 407  
North York, Ontario  
M2J 4Y8  
http://camvap.ca  
Regional Offices  
Regional Offices  
Mazda Canada Inc.  
Western Region  
8171 Ackroyd Road  
Suite 2000  
Areas Covered  
Alberta,  
British Columbia,  
Manitoba,  
Richmond, B.C.  
V6X 3K1  
Saskatchewan,  
Yukon  
(604) 303–5670  
Mazda Canada Inc.  
Central Region  
55 Vogell Road  
Richmond Hill, Ontario.  
L4B 3K5  
Ontario  
1 (800) 263–4680  
Mazda Canada Inc.  
Quebec Region/Atlantic Region  
6111 Route Trans  
Canadienne  
Quebec,  
New Brunswick,  
Nova Scotia,  
Pointe Claire, Quebec  
H9R 5A5  
Prince Edward Island,  
Newfoundland  
(514) 694–6390  
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE (PUERTO RICO & VIRGIN ISLANDS)  
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. That is why all  
Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep  
your Mazda vehicle in top condition.  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement  
regarding the service of your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Authorized  
Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take the following  
steps:  
STEP 1  
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest  
and best way to address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved  
by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS  
MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of the  
authorized dealer or the OWNER.  
STEP 2  
If, after following STEP 1, you feel the need for further assistance, please  
contact your area’s Mazda representative (Indicated on the next page).  
Please help us by providing the following information:  
1. Your name, address, and telephone number  
2. Year and model of vehicle  
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration  
or title or located on the upper driver’s side corner of the dash)  
4. Purchase date and current mileage  
5. Your authorized dealer’s name and location  
6. Your question(s)  
If you would like to write a letter, please address it to the following,  
Attn: Customer Assistance  
Plaza Motors Corp.  
Mazda de Puerto Rico  
P.O. Box 362722  
San Juan, Puerto Rico  
00936–2722  
Tel: (787) 788–9300  
This way, we can be sure to respond to you as efficiently as possible.  
That is our goal.  
If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda  
Distributor.  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)  
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer  
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the  
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of  
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the  
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and  
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or  
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer  
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund  
or replacement vehicle.  
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer  
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its  
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership  
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs  
first:  
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity  
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR  
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity  
(a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or  
safety of the vehicle) OR  
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total  
of more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time).  
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the  
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the  
following address:  
Mazda North American Operations  
7755, Irvine Center Drive  
Irvine, CA 92618–2922  
MAZDA IMPORTERS/DISTRIBUTORS  
U.S.A (Importer/Distributor)  
Mazda North American Operations  
7755 Irvine Center Drive  
Irvine, CA 92618–2922  
P.O. Box 19734  
Irvine, CA 92623–9734  
TEL: 1 (800) 222–5500 (in U.S.A.)  
(949) 727–1990 (outside U.S.A.)  
(Distributor in each area)  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
CANADA  
Mazda Canada, Inc.  
55 Vogell Road  
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 3K5 Canada  
TEL: 1 (800) 263–4680 (in Canada)  
(416) 609–9909 (outside Canada)  
PUERTO RICO & VIRGIN ISLANDS  
Plaza Motors Corp. (Mazda de Puerto Rico)  
P.O. Box 362722, San Juan, Puerto Rico 00936–2722  
TEL: (787) 788–9300  
GUAM  
(d.b.a. Triple J. Enterprises, Inc.)  
P.O. Box 6066 Tamuning, Guam  
TEL: (671) 646–9216  
SAIPAN  
Pacific International Marianas, Inc.  
(d.b.a. Midway Motors)  
P.O. Box 887 Saipan, MP 96950  
TEL: (670) 234–7524  
Triple J Saipan, Inc.  
(d.b.a. Triple J Motors)  
Beach Road  
Chalan LauLau  
Saipan, MP 96950  
TEL: (670) 235–4868  
AMERICAN SAMOA  
Polynesia Motors, Inc.  
P.O. Box 1120, Pago Pago, American Samoa 96799  
TEL: (684) 699–1854  
WARRANTIES FOR YOUR MAZDA  
New Vehicle Limited Warranty  
Safety Restraint System Limited Warranty  
Anti-perforation Limited Warranty  
Federal Emission Control Warranty  
– Emission Defect Warranty  
– Emission Performance Warranty  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
California Emission Control Warranty (if applicable)  
Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty  
Tire Warranty  
NOTE: Detailed warranty information is provided with your Mazda  
portfolio.  
Outside the United States  
Government regulations in the United States require that automobiles  
meet specific emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore,  
vehicles built for use in the United States, may differ from those sold in  
other countries.  
The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle  
to receive satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly  
recommend that you NOT take your Mazda outside the United States.  
However, in the event that you are moving to Canada permanently,  
Mazda vehicles built for use in the United States could be eligible for  
exportation to Canada with specific vehicle modifications to comply with  
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety requirements.  
Special Note: The above is applicable for permanent import/export  
situations and not related to travelers on vacation.  
You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside  
of the United States:  
Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or  
low-octane fuel will affect vehicle performance and damage the  
emission controls and engine.  
Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement  
parts may not be available.  
Please refer to your manufacturers warranty booklet for more  
information.  
Outside Canada  
Government regulations in Canada require that automobiles meet specific  
emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore, vehicles built for  
use in Canada, may differ from those sold in other countries.  
The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle  
to receive satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly  
recommend that you NOT take your Mazda outside Canada. However, in  
the event that you are moving to the United States permanently, Mazda  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
vehicles built for use in Canada could be eligible for exportation to the  
United States with specific vehicle modifications to comply with the  
United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety requirements.  
Special Note: The above is applicable for permanent import/export  
situations and not related to travelers on vacation.  
You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside  
of Canada:  
Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or  
low-octane fuel will affect vehicle performance and damage the  
emission controls and engine.  
Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement  
parts may not be available.  
Please refer to your manufacturers warranty booklet for more  
information.  
ADD-ON NON-GENUINE PARTS AND ACCESSORIES  
Non-genuine parts and accessories for Mazda vehicles can be found in  
stores. These may fit your vehicle, but they are not approved by the  
manufacturer for use with Mazda vehicles. When you install non-genuine  
parts or accessories, they could affect your vehicle’s performance or  
safety system; the manufacturer’s warranty doesn’t cover this. Before you  
install any non-genuine parts or accessories, consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
WARNING: Installation of Non-Genuine Parts or Accessories:  
Installation of non-genuine parts or accessories could be  
dangerous. Improperly designed parts or accessories could  
seriously affect your vehicle’s performance or safety system.  
This could cause you to have an accident or increase your  
chances of injuries in an accident. Always consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer before you install non-genuine parts or  
accessories.  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
WARNING: Add-On Electrical and Electronic Equipment:  
Incorrectly choosing or installing improper add-on equipment or  
choosing an improper installer could be dangerous. Essential  
systems could be damaged, causing engine stalling, air-bag  
(SRS) activation, ABS inactivation, or a fire in the vehicle. Be  
very careful in choosing and installing add-on electrical  
equipment, such as mobile telephones, two-way radios, stereo  
systems, and car alarm systems.  
Mazda assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may  
result from the installation of add-on non-genuine parts or accessories.  
SERVICE PUBLICATIONS  
Factory-authorized Mazda service publications are available for owners  
who wish to do some of their own maintenance and repair.  
When requesting any of our publications through an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer, refer to the chart below.  
If they don’t have what you need in stock, they can order it for you.  
PUBLICATION ORDER NUMBER  
9999 95 022B 06  
PUBLICATION DESCRIPTION  
WORKSHOP MANUAL  
WIRING DIAGRAM  
9999 95 020G 06  
9999 95 023C 06  
OWNER’S MANUAL  
WORKSHOP MANUAL:  
Covers recommended maintenance and repair procedures of the drive  
train, body and chassis.  
WIRING DIAGRAM:  
Provides electrical schematics as well as component location for the  
entire electrical system.  
OWNER’S MANUAL:  
This booklet contains information regarding the proper care and  
operation of your vehicle. This is not a technician’s manual.  
Please note that your Authorized Mazda Dealership has trained  
personnel and special service tools to correctly and safely  
maintain Mazda vehicles.  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)  
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash, or  
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National  
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying  
Mazda Corporation.  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and  
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a  
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved  
in individual problems between you, your dealer or Mazda Corporation.  
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at  
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;  
or write to:  
Administrator  
NHTSA  
400 Seventh Street, SW  
Washington, D.C. 20590  
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from  
http://www.safercar.gov.  
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)  
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or  
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport  
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510.  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
WASHING THE EXTERIOR  
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral  
pH shampoo.  
Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing  
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted  
surfaces.  
Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to  
strong, direct sunlight.  
Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for  
best results.  
Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to  
eliminate water spotting.  
It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the  
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause  
damage to the vehicle.  
Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings  
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s  
paintwork and trim over time.  
Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a  
car wash.  
Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted  
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,  
wash off as soon as possible.  
WAXING  
Applying a premium paint sealant to your vehicle every six months will  
assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.  
Wash the vehicle first. Refer to Washing the exterior for more  
detailed information.  
Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use a premium liquid wax.  
Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body  
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof  
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl  
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.  
PAINT CHIPS  
Your dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color. Touch-up  
paint can be used to repair minor scratches to painted surfaces.  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar  
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.  
Always read the instructions before using the products.  
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND COVERS  
Aluminum wheel rims or covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish.  
In order to maintain their shine:  
Clean with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo.  
Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or  
covers.  
Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your  
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning  
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust  
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.  
Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel  
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.  
To remove tar and grease, use Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil  
Remover (0000–77–410E-01), available from your authorized Mazda  
dealer.  
ENGINE  
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt  
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:  
Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The  
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause  
damage.  
Never spray the engine or other engine components with water. Water  
will damage the engine or other engine components.  
Spray Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (0000–77–410E-09), available at  
your authorized Mazda dealer, on all parts that require cleaning and  
pressure rinse clean.  
Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning  
the engine.  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
2.3L Engine  
2.3L  
16 VALVE  
3.0L Engine  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
4.0L Engine  
Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the  
running engine may cause internal damage.  
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS  
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are  
available from your dealer.  
For routine cleaning, use cool or lukewarm water with a neutral pH  
shampoo.  
If tar or grease spots are present, use Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil  
Remover (0000–77–410E-01), available at your authorized Mazda  
dealer.  
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES  
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be  
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the  
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include  
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellant  
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants  
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and  
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:  
The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with  
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner  
(0000–77–400E-01 and 0000–77–400E-02), available from your  
authorized Mazda dealer.  
The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or a  
windshield washer concentrate. This washer fluid concentrate contains  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
a special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot  
wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car  
wash facilities. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear  
worn or do not function properly.  
Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.  
Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.  
INSTRUMENT PANEL / INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS  
Clean the interior trim areas and instrument panel with a damp cloth,  
then with a clean, dry cloth, or use Mazda Deluxe Leather and Vinyl  
Cleaner (0000-77-430E-15).  
Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of  
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the  
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.  
Do not use household or glass cleaners, as these may damage the  
finish.  
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents  
when cleaning the steering wheel, instrument panel or interior  
trim areas to avoid contamination of the airbag systems.  
Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in  
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan  
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted  
surfaces.  
INTERIOR  
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, and seat belts:  
Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.  
Remove light stains and soil with Upholstery Cleaner and Spot  
Remover (0000–77–430E-01), available at your authorized Mazda  
dealer.  
If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first  
with Spot and Stain Remover (0000–77–410E-01), available at your  
authorized Mazda dealer.  
If a solvent ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the  
entire area immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.  
Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can  
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of  
the seat materials.  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
UNDERBODY  
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and  
door drain holes free from packed dirt.  
MAZDA CAR CARE PRODUCTS  
Your Mazda dealer has many quality products available to clean your  
vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products have been  
specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom  
designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle. Each  
product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid  
specifications. For best results, use these products or products of  
equivalent quality. These products are available at your authorized Mazda  
dealer.  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
INTRODUCTION  
Be extremely careful to prevent injury to yourself and others or damage  
to your vehicle when using this manual for inspection and maintenance.  
If you’re unsure about any procedure it describes, we strongly urge you  
to have a reliable and qualified service shop perform the work, preferably  
an authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Factory-trained Mazda technicians and genuine Mazda parts are best for  
your vehicle. Without this expertise and the parts that have been  
designed and made especially for your Mazda, inadequate, incomplete,  
and insufficient servicing may result in problems. This could lead to  
vehicle damage or an accident and injuries.  
For expert advice and quality service, consult an authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
The owner should retain evidence that proper maintenance has been  
performed as prescribed.  
Claims against the warranty resulting from lack of maintenance, as  
opposed to defective materials or authorized Mazda workmanship, will  
not be honored.  
Any auto repair shop using parts equivalent to your Mazda’s original  
equipment may perform maintenance. But we recommend that it  
always be done by an authorized Mazda Dealer using genuine  
Mazda parts.  
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE  
Schedule 1 — Normal Driving Conditions/Emission Control  
Systems  
Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the  
following conditions apply. If any do apply, follow Schedule 2.  
Repeated short-distance driving.  
Driving in dusty conditions.  
Towing a trailer.  
Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic.  
Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation.  
High-speed operation with a fully loaded vehicle.  
Off-road operation.  
NOTE: After the described period, continue to follow the described  
maintenance at the recommended intervals.  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
CHART SYMBOLS  
I: Inspect and if necessary, correct, clean or replace  
A Adjust  
R: Replace  
L: Lubricate  
Normal driving service intervals — perform at the months or distances  
shown, whichever occurs first.  
Maintenance Interval (Number of months or Miles (km),  
whichever comes first)  
Months  
4
5
8
12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44  
48  
60  
Maintenance Item  
x 1000 miles  
(x 1000 km)  
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55  
(8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96)  
ENGINE  
Engine oil  
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Oil filter  
PCV valve  
*3  
AIR CLEANER  
Air cleaner filter  
IGNITION SYSTEM  
Spark plugs  
R
R
*4  
COOLING SYSTEM  
Engine Coolant (yellow)  
Replace at first 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or 72  
months; after that, every 50,000 miles (80,000 km)  
or 36 months  
Coolant condition and protection,  
hoses and clamps — annually —  
prior to cold weather every 12  
months  
I
I
I
I
CHASSIS AND BODY  
Wheel lug nut torque  
*1  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Inspect tires for wear and rotate (X  
= recommended interval for optimal  
tire life)  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Clutch reservoir fluid level  
Front wheel bearings (4x2)  
I
I
I
I
I
I
L
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Maintenance Interval (Number of months or Miles (km),  
whichever comes first)  
Months  
4
5
8
12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44  
48  
60  
Maintenance Item  
x 1000 miles  
(x 1000 km)  
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55  
(8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96)  
Disc brake system  
Caliper slide rails  
I
L
I
I
L
I
I
L
I
I
L
I
Drum brake system, lines and hoses  
Exhaust system for leaks, damage,  
looseness  
I
I
Manual transmission fluid  
Automatic  
transmission fluid  
*2  
I
I
I
I
Exhaust system shielding (for  
trapped material)  
Propeller shaft U-joints (if equipped  
with grease fittings)  
L
L
I
L
L
L
I
L
Parking brake system (for damage  
and operation)  
I
I
Ball joints (4x2)  
I/L  
I/L  
I/L  
I/L  
Transfer case fluid (4x4)  
Rear axle lubricant  
Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km)  
Does not require replacement unless rear axle  
submerged in water  
Accessory drive belts  
Fuel filter  
*5  
R
I
R
Steering linkage, ball joints,  
suspension and driveshaft  
I
I
I
*1 The wheel lug nuts must be retightened to the proper specifications  
at 500 miles (800 km) of new vehicle operation, at any wheel change, or  
at any other time the wheel lug nuts have been loosened. Refer to Wheel  
Lug Nut Torque Specification in the Tires, Wheels and Loading  
chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification.  
*2 Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km) unless submerged in water.  
*3 At 60,000 miles (96,000 km), the dealer will replace the PCV valve at  
no cost, except Canada and California vehicles.  
*4 Refer to vehicle emission control information label for spark plug and  
gap specifications.  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
*5 The California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to  
perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty nor  
limit recall liability prior to completion of the vehicle’s useful life.  
Schedule 1 continued  
Maintenance Interval (Number of months or Miles (km),  
whichever comes first)  
Months  
52 56 60 64 68 72 76 80 84 88 92  
96  
Maintenance Item  
x 1000 miles  
(x 1000 km)  
65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120  
(104) (112) (121) (128) (136) (144) (152) (160) (168) (176) (184) (192)  
ENGINE  
Engine oil  
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Oil filter  
PCV valve  
*3  
AIR CLEANER  
Air cleaner filter  
IGNITION SYSTEM  
Spark plugs  
R
R
*4  
R
COOLING SYSTEM  
Engine Coolant (yellow)  
Replace at first 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or 72  
months; after that, every 50,000 miles (80,000 km)  
or 36 months  
Coolant condition and protection,  
I
I
I
I
hoses and clamps — annually —prior  
to cold weather every 12 months  
CHASSIS AND BODY  
Wheel lug nut torque  
*1  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Inspect tires for wear and rotate (X  
= recommended interval for optimal  
tire life)  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Clutch reservoir fluid level  
Front wheel bearings (4x2)  
Disc brake system  
I
I
I
I
I
I
L
I
I
L
I
I
L
I
I
L
I
Caliper slide rails  
L
I
Drum brake system, lines and hoses  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Maintenance Interval (Number of months or Miles (km),  
whichever comes first)  
Months  
52 56 60 64 68 72 76 80 84 88 92  
65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120  
(104) (112) (121) (128) (136) (144) (152) (160) (168) (176) (184) (192)  
96  
Maintenance Item  
x 1000 miles  
(x 1000 km)  
Exhaust system for leaks, damage,  
looseness  
I
I
Manual transmission fluid  
R
Automatic  
transmission fluid  
*2  
I
I
I
I
Exhaust system shielding (for  
trapped material)  
Propeller shaft U-joints (if equipped  
with grease fittings)  
L
L
I
L
L
L
I
L
Parking brake system (for damage  
and operation)  
I
I
Ball joints (4x2)  
I/L  
I/L  
I/L  
I/L  
Transfer case fluid (4x4)  
Rear axle lubricant  
Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km)  
Does not require replacement unless rear axle  
submerged in water  
Accessory drive belts  
I
Fuel filter  
*5  
R
I
R
Steering linkage, ball joints,  
suspension and driveshaft  
I
I
I
*1 The wheel lug nuts must be retightened to the proper specifications  
at 500 miles (800 km) of new vehicle operation, at any wheel change, or  
at any other time the wheel lug nuts have been loosened. Refer to Wheel  
Lug Nut Torque Specification in the Tires, Wheels and Loading  
chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification.  
*2 Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km) unless submerged in water.  
*3 At 60,000 miles (96,000 km), the dealer will replace the PCV valve at  
no cost, except Canada and California vehicles.  
*4 Refer to vehicle emission control information label for spark plug and  
gap specifications.  
*5 The California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to  
perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty nor  
limit recall liability prior to completion of the vehicle’s useful life.  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
SCHEDULE 2 — SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS  
If your driving habits FREQUENTLY include one or more of the  
following conditions:  
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) when outside temperatures  
remain below freezing.  
Towing a trailer, or carrying maximum loads.  
Operating in severe dust conditions.  
Operating during hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic.  
Extensive idling, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery service.  
High speed operation with a fully loaded vehicle (max. GVW).  
Off-road operation  
Change ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER every 3 months or 3,000 miles  
(4,800 km) whichever occurs first.  
NOTE: Idling the engine for extended periods will accumulate more  
hours of use on your vehicle than is actually indicated by the mileage  
odometer. Consequently, the odometer reading can be often misleading  
when determining the right time to change your engine oil and filter. If  
you are using your vehicle in a manner which allows it to remain  
stationary while the engine is running for long periods (door-to-door  
delivery, taxi, police, power/utility company trucks, or similar duty), then  
Mazda recommends you increase the frequency of oil and filter changes  
to an interval equivalent to 200 ENGINE HOURS or use. Since most  
vehicles are not equipped with hour-meters, it may be necessary for you  
to approximate your idle time and plan oil/filter changes accordingly.  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Special Operating  
Conditions  
3,000  
miles or  
3 months  
Suggested Maintenance  
Interval  
5,000 15,000 30,000 60,000  
miles miles miles miles required required required miles miles  
As  
As  
As  
30,000 60,000  
Towing a trailer or  
using a camper or  
car top carrier  
X
X
X
X
X
X
Extensive idling or  
low-speed driving  
for long distances  
as in heavy  
commercial use  
such as delivery,  
taxi or patrol car  
X
X
X
X
X
X
Operating in dusty  
conditions such as  
unpaved or dusty  
roads  
X
X
X
X
Off road operation  
X
X
For specific recommendations see your authorized Mazda dealer or  
qualified service professional.  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
OWNER MAINTENANCE  
Owner Maintenance Schedule  
The owner or a qualified service technician should make these vehicle  
inspections at the indicated intervals to ensure safe and dependable  
operation.  
Bring any problem to the attention of an Authorized Mazda Dealer or  
qualified service technician as soon as possible.  
While operating your vehicle  
Note any changes in the sound of the exhaust or any smell or exhaust  
fumes in the vehicle.  
Check for vibrations in the steering wheel. Notice any increased  
steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or change in the  
straight ahead position.  
Notice if your vehicle constantly turns slightly or “pulls” to one side  
when traveling on a smooth, level road.  
When stopping, listen and check for strange sounds, pulling to one  
side, increased brake pedal travel or “hard to push” brake pedal.  
If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transmission occur,  
check the transmission fluid level.  
Check automatic transmission Park function.  
Check parking brake.  
At least monthly  
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.  
Check tires for wear and proper air pressure.  
Check engine oil level.  
Check coolant level in the coolant reservoir.  
Check washer fluid level.  
At least twice a year (for example, every spring and fall)  
Check power steering fluid level.  
Check clutch fluid level (if equipped).  
Check and clean body and door drain holes.  
Check and lubricate all hinges, latches, and outside locks.  
Check and lubricate door rubber weather strips.  
Check parking brake for proper operation.  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Check lap/shoulder belts and seat latches for wear and function.  
Check air pressure in spare tire.  
Check windshield washer spray and wiper operation. Clean wiper  
blades with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.  
Check safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, air bag, seat belt) for  
operation.  
Check cooling system fluid level and verify coolant specific gravity is  
correct for summer or winter conditions.  
Check battery water level (non-maintenance free).  
Check battery connections and clean if necessary.  
Retightening lug nuts  
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km)  
after any wheel disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel  
removal, etc.).  
Refer to Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specification in the Tires, Wheels  
and Loading chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification.  
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS  
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance  
information which makes tracking routine service easy.  
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can  
provide necessary parts and service. Check your “Warranty Information”  
to find out which parts and services are covered.  
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts  
conforming to specifications. Genuine Mazda parts are designed and built  
to provide the best performance in your vehicle.  
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE  
Do not work on a hot engine.  
Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.  
Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed  
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.  
Keep all open flames and other burning (cigarettes) material away  
from the battery and all fuel related parts.  
Working with the engine off  
Automatic transmission/transaxle:  
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.  
3. Block the wheels.  
Manual transmission/transaxle:  
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in 1  
(First).  
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.  
3. Block the wheels.  
Working with the engine on  
Automatic transmission:  
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).  
2. Block the wheels.  
Manual transmission:  
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in  
N (Neutral).  
2. Block the wheels.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or  
personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air  
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is  
running.  
OPENING THE HOOD  
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood  
release handle located under  
the bottom of the instrument  
panel near the steering column.  
2. Go to the front of the vehicle  
and release the auxiliary latch  
that is located under the front  
center of the hood.  
3. Lift the hood and support it  
with the prop rod.  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT  
2.3L I4 engine  
1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir  
2. Engine coolant reservoir  
3. Engine oil dipstick  
4. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission)  
5. Engine oil filler cap  
6. Brake fluid reservoir  
7. Power distribution box  
8. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission)  
9. Battery  
10. Power steering fluid reservoir  
11. Air filter assembly  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
3.0L V6 engine  
1. Engine coolant reservoir  
2. Windshield washer fluid reservoir  
3. Engine oil filler cap  
4. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission)  
5. Engine oil dipstick  
6. Brake fluid reservoir  
7. Power distribution box  
8. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission)  
9. Battery  
10. Power steering fluid reservoir  
11. Air filter assembly  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
4.0L SOHC V6 engine  
1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir  
2. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission)  
3. Engine oil filler cap  
4. Engine oil dipstick  
5. Brake fluid reservoir  
6. Power distribution box  
7. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission)  
8. Battery  
9. Power steering fluid reservoir  
10. Air filter assembly  
11. Engine coolant reservoir  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID  
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the  
level is low. In very cold weather, do  
not fill the reservoir completely.  
E
H R  
S
F
A
LU  
W
ID  
O
N
L
Y
Only use a washer fluid that meets  
Mazda specification . Do not use any  
special washer fluid such as  
RADIATOR  
COOLANT  
ONLY  
windshield water repellent type fluid  
or bug wash. They may cause  
squeaking, chatter noise, streaking  
and smearing. Refer to Refill  
capacities in this chapter.  
State or local regulations on volatile  
organic compounds may restrict the  
use of methanol, a common  
windshield washer antifreeze  
additive. Washer fluids containing  
non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold  
weather protection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper  
blades or washer system.  
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below  
40° F (4.5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection.  
Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold  
weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase  
the risk of injury or accident.  
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer  
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system  
components.  
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES  
If the wiper blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshield and  
wiper blades using undiluted windshield wiper solution or a mild  
detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clean water. To avoid damaging the  
blades, do not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner or other solvents.  
Check the wiper blades for wear at least twice a year or when they seem  
less effective. Substances such as tree sap and some hot wax treatments  
used by commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wiper blades.  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Changing the wiper blades  
1. Pull the wiper arm away from  
the vehicle. Turn the blade at an  
angle from the wiper arm. Push  
the lock pin manually to release  
the blade and pull the wiper  
blade down toward the  
windshield to remove it from  
the arm.  
2. Attach the new wiper to the  
wiper arm and press it into  
place until a click is heard.  
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.  
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the  
windshield, refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning  
chapter.  
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to  
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The  
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the  
wiper rubber element.  
ENGINE OIL  
Checking the engine oil  
Refer to scheduled maintenance for the appropriate intervals for  
checking the engine oil.  
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.  
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into  
the oil pan.  
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in  
P (Park) (automatic transmission) or 1 (First) (manual  
transmission).  
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.  
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick.  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
2.3L I4 engine  
MIN  
MAX  
3.0L V6 engine  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
4.0L SOHC V6 engine  
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it  
again.  
If the oil level is between the two holes or between the MIN and  
MAX marks (depending on application), the oil level is acceptable,  
DO NOT ADD OIL.  
If the oil level is below the lower hole or the MIN mark, add enough  
oil to raise the level between the two holes or between the MIN-MAX  
range.  
2.3L I4 engine  
SAE 5W-20  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
3.0L V6 engine  
SAE 5W-20  
4.0L SOHC V6 engine  
SAE 5W-30  
Oil levels above the MAX mark or upper hole may cause engine  
damage. Some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized  
dealer.  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.  
Adding engine oil  
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine  
oil in this chapter.  
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only  
certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine  
oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.  
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is within the  
normal range on the engine oil level dipstick.  
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.  
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap 1/4 turn  
until it stops.  
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the  
engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.  
Engine Oil Recommendations  
2.3L & 3.0L Engines  
Look for this certification  
trademark.  
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended.  
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American  
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms  
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel  
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and  
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
automobile manufacturers. Use an equivalent oil Mazda specification.  
SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability  
performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine.  
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule  
listed in scheduled maintenance.  
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine  
treatments. They are unnecessary and could, under certain conditions,  
lead to engine damage which is not covered by your warranty.  
4.0L Engine  
Look for this certification  
trademark.  
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended.  
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American  
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms  
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel  
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and  
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese  
automobile manufacturers. Use an equivalent Mazda Specification.  
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine  
treatments. They are unnecessary and could, under certain conditions,  
lead to engine damage which is not covered by your warranty.  
Change your engine oil according to the appropriate schedule listed in  
scheduled maintenance.  
Engine Oil Filter Recommendation  
Change your engine oil filter according to the appropriate schedule listed  
in scheduled maintenance. Mazda production and aftermarket (Mazda)  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life. If a  
replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Mazda Material and  
design specifications, start-up engine noises or knock may be  
experienced.  
Mazda production and replacement oil filters are designed for added  
engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used that  
does not meet Mazda material and design specifications, start-up engine  
noises or knock may be experienced.  
It is recommended you use the appropriate Mazda oil filter or another  
with equivalent performance for your engine application.  
BATTERY  
Your vehicle is equipped with a  
Mazda maintenance-free battery  
which normally does not require  
additional water during its life of  
service.  
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled  
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.  
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and  
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to  
the battery terminals.  
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables  
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the  
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.  
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to  
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect  
battery performance and durability.  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be  
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an  
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery  
during storage.  
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which  
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames,  
sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When  
working near the battery, always shield your face and protect  
your eyes. Always provide proper ventilation.  
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive  
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the  
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the  
vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with  
your hands on opposite corners.  
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries  
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.  
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect  
against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid  
contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a  
minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If  
acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.  
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories  
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.  
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,  
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When  
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must  
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and  
performance. To begin this process:  
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.  
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral  
position (manual transmission), turn off all accessories and start the  
engine.  
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.  
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.  
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.  
The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to  
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.  
If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle  
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle  
trim is eventually relearned.  
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the  
transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the  
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and  
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time the  
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation to its  
optimum shift feel.  
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,  
the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is  
reconnected.  
Always dispose of automotive  
batteries in a responsible manner.  
Follow your local authorized  
standards for disposal. Call your  
local authorized recycling center  
to find out more about recycling  
automotive batteries.  
RECYCLE  
ENGINE COOLANT  
Checking engine coolant  
Your engine’s cooling system has been factory-filled with a 50/50 mixture  
of distilled water and Mazda Genuine Engine Coolant, or an equivalent  
premium engine coolant that meets Mazda specification.  
A 50/50 mixture of distilled water and Mazda Genuine Engine Coolant  
provides:  
maximum cooling system efficiency.  
freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).  
boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).  
protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
an accurate temperature readout from the engine coolant  
gauge.  
The engine coolant must be maintained at the correct fluid level  
and concentration to work properly. If the engine coolant fluid  
level and concentration is not maintained correctly, damage to  
the engine and cooling system may result.  
2.3L engine  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
3.0L & 4.0L engines  
When the engine is cold, check the level of the engine coolant in the  
reservoir.  
The engine coolant should be at the “cold fill level” or within the “cold  
fill range” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir (depending upon  
application).  
Confirm the color and type of engine coolant before adding, to avoid  
mixing incompatible products.  
Refer to scheduled maintenance for service interval schedules.  
Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your  
vehicle in this chapter.  
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,  
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is  
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding  
engine coolant in this chapter.  
WARNING: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not  
use engine coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid  
outside of its specified function and vehicle location.  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Adding engine coolant  
Use only Mazda Genuine Engine Coolant or a premium engine  
coolant that meets a Mazda specification.  
DO NOT USE Extended Life Engine Coolant (orange in color).  
DO NOT USE a DEX-COOLengine coolant or an equivalent  
engine coolant.  
DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol antifreeze or any engine  
coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze.  
DO NOT USE supplemental coolant additives in your vehicle.  
These additives may harm your engine’s cooling system.  
DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your  
vehicle. Make sure the correct coolant is used.  
DO NOT MIX recycled coolant and conventional coolant  
together in your vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants may harm  
your engine’s cooling system.  
The use of an improper coolant may harm engine and cooling  
system components and may void the warranty of your vehicle’s  
engine cooling system. If you are unsure which type of coolant  
your vehicle requires, contact your local authorized dealer.  
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer  
fluid reservoir. If engine coolant is sprayed onto the windshield,  
it could make it difficult to see through the windshield.  
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant  
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the  
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.  
NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.  
NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.  
Engine coolant concentrations above 68% or below 40% will  
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine  
coolant and may cause engine damage.  
A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case of  
emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the  
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of  
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone  
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,  
overheating or freezing.  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap  
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery  
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and  
water to the “FULL COLD” level. For all other vehicles, which have a  
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to  
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with  
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.  
Note: The 3.0L and 4.0L V6 engines use the overflow system, and the  
2.3L I4 engines use the degas system.  
WARNING: To avoid scalding hot steam or coolant from being  
released from the engine cooling system, never remove the  
reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot. Failure to  
follow this warning may result in possible severe personal  
injury and damage to the engine’s cooling system.  
Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by  
following these steps:  
1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engine off and let it cool.  
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly  
turn cap counterclockwise until pressure begins to release.  
3. Step back while the pressure releases.  
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the  
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.  
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see  
above), to within the “COLD FILL RANGE” or the “FULL COLD”  
level on the reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow  
system, fill the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is  
almost full.  
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. Cap must be tightly  
installed to prevent coolant loss.  
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration, refer  
to Checking engine coolant. If the concentration is not 50/50  
(protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the  
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50  
coolant concentration.  
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant  
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If  
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and  
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per  
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.  
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low  
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine  
damage.  
Recycled engine coolant  
Not all coolant recycling processes produce coolant which meets Mazda  
specification. Use of a recycled engine coolant which does not meet  
Mazda specifications may harm engine and cooling system components.  
Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner.  
Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and  
disposing of automotive fluids.  
Coolant refill capacity  
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer  
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.  
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant  
in this section.  
Severe climates  
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34°F [–36°C ]):  
It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration  
above 50%.  
NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.  
Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will  
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine  
coolant and may cause engine damage.  
Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the  
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate  
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the  
winter months.  
If you drive in extremely hot climates:  
It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration  
above 40%.  
NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.  
Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will  
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine  
coolant and may cause engine damage.  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will  
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine  
coolant and may cause engine damage.  
Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the  
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate  
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.  
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50  
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system  
and engine protection.  
FUEL FILTER  
For fuel filter replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to  
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for  
changing the fuel filter.  
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Mazda part. The  
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system  
if an authorized Mazda fuel filter is not used.  
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS  
Important safety precautions  
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an  
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and  
fire.  
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel  
filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait  
until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap.  
Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others.  
WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap,  
excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system  
or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may  
result in possible personal injury.  
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death  
if misused or mishandled.  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
WARNING: Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a  
cancer-causing agent.  
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:  
Extinguish all smoking materials  
and any open flames before  
fueling your vehicle.  
Always turn off the vehicle before  
fueling.  
Automotive fuels can be harmful  
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if  
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,  
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately  
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.  
Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind  
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,  
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious  
illness and permanent injury.  
Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,  
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and  
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could  
lead to permanent injury.  
Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is  
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated  
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or  
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.  
Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of  
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,  
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive  
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is  
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and  
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse  
reaction.  
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and  
never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never  
smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under  
certain conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling  
excess fumes.  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can  
produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is  
pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.  
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when  
filling an ungrounded fuel container:  
Place approved fuel container on  
the ground.  
DO NOT fill a fuel container while  
it is in the vehicle (including the  
cargo area/pickup bed).  
Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while  
filling.  
DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill  
position.  
Fuel Filler Cap  
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off  
feature.  
When fueling your vehicle:  
1. Turn the engine off.  
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/4 of a turn to remove  
it.  
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.  
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the  
filler pipe.  
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until it clicks at least once.  
If the check fuel cap lamp  
or a “check fuel cap” message comes on,  
the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. The lamp or message  
can come on after several driving events after you’ve refueled your  
vehicle.  
At the next opportunity, safely pull off of the road, remove the fuel filler  
cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it. The check fuel cap  
lamp  
or “check fuel cap” message may not reset immediately; it may  
or “check fuel  
take several driving cycles for the check fuel cap lamp  
cap” message to turn off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up  
(after four or more hours with the engine off) followed by city and  
highway driving.  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Continuing to drive with the check fuel cap lamp  
or “check fuel cap”  
message on may cause the  
lamp to turn on as well.  
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler  
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The warranty may be void  
for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct  
genuine Mazda fuel filler cap is not used.  
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel  
filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait  
until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap.  
Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others.  
WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap,  
excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system  
or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may  
result in personal injury.  
Choosing the right fuel  
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum  
of 10% ethanol. Your vehicle was not designed to run on E85 fuels that  
are blended with a maximum of 85% ethanol. The use of leaded fuel is  
prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle. Do not use fuel  
containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system components.  
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic  
compounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate that  
these additives can cause your vehicle’s emission control system to  
deteriorate more rapidly.  
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was  
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.  
Cleaner air  
Mazda endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to  
improve air quality, per the recommendations in the Choosing the Right  
Fuel section.  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Octane recommendations  
Your vehicle is designed to use  
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with  
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.  
We do not recommend the use of  
gasolines labeled as “Regular” that  
87  
(R+M)/2 METHOD  
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.  
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if  
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel  
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to  
prevent any engine damage.  
Fuel quality  
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability  
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. “Premium”  
unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use  
“Regular” unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to  
become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your authorized  
dealer.  
Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It  
should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel  
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane  
rating. These products have not been approved for your engine and  
could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of  
using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your  
warranty.  
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-Wide Fuel Charter  
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved  
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.  
Gasolines that meet the World-Wide Fuel Charter should be used when  
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the  
World-Wide Fuel Charter.  
Running out of fuel  
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse  
effect on powertrain components.  
If you have run out of fuel:  
You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after  
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to  
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer  
than normal.  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the  
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than 1  
gallon (3.8L) may be required.  
The  
indicator may come on. For more information on the “check  
engine” or the “service engine soon” indicator, refer to Warning lights  
and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.  
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY  
Measuring techniques  
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the  
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as  
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fillups or fuel gauge readings are  
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend  
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles  
(1,600 km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more  
accurate measurement after 2,000 miles-3,000 miles  
(3,000 km–5,000 km).  
Filling the tank  
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to  
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance  
product specifications and capacities section of this chapter.  
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the  
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the  
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates  
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel  
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.  
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should  
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your  
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be  
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the  
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.  
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:  
Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,  
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.  
Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time  
the tank is filled.  
Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.  
Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.  
Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the  
same direction each time you fill up.  
Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.  
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.  
Calculating fuel economy  
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading  
(in miles or kilometers).  
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in  
gallons or liters).  
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record  
the current odometer reading.  
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer  
reading.  
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel  
economy:  
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.  
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total  
kilometers traveled.  
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city  
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel  
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records  
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel  
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.  
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits  
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change  
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.  
Habits  
Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.  
Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel  
economy.  
Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste  
fuel.  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.  
Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.  
Slow down gradually.  
Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%  
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).  
Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.  
Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.  
You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if  
unnecessary shifting between fourth and fifth gear occurs.  
Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel  
economy.  
Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may  
reduce fuel economy.  
Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel  
economy.  
Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.  
Maintenance  
Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.  
Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel  
economy.  
Use recommended engine oil. Refer to the Maintenance product  
specifications and capacities section of this chapter.  
Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the  
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks  
found in scheduled maintenance.  
Conditions  
Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy  
at any speed.  
Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately  
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).  
Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug  
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may  
reduce fuel economy.  
Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.  
Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first  
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to  
driving on hilly terrain.  
Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top  
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.  
Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than  
two-wheel-drive operation.  
Close windows for high speed driving.  
EPA window sticker  
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your  
authorized dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle.  
The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy  
comparisons with other vehicles.  
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window  
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of MPG (L/100 km)  
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy  
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.  
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM  
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a  
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with  
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic  
converter and other emission control components continue to work  
properly:  
Use only the specified fuel listed.  
Avoid running out of fuel.  
Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at  
high speeds.  
Have the items listed in the scheduled maintenance section  
performed according to the specified schedule.  
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the scheduled maintenance  
section are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to  
its emissions system.  
If other than Mazda authorized parts are used for maintenance  
replacements or for service of components affecting emission control,  
such non-Mazda parts should be equivalent to genuine Mazda parts in  
performance and durability.  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass  
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the  
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.  
Illumination of the  
indicator, charging system warning light or the  
temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of  
engine power, could indicate that the emission control system is not  
working properly.  
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and  
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.  
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By  
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,  
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not  
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent  
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on  
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the  
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up  
specifications.  
Please consult your “Warranty Information” for complete emission  
warranty information.  
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)  
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s  
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On  
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the  
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet  
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your  
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the  
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected a malfunction.  
Temporary malfunctions may cause the  
Examples are:  
indicator to illuminate.  
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run  
poorly.  
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run  
poorly.  
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler  
cap in this chapter.  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.  
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank  
with good quality fuel, properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the  
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any  
other temporary malfunctions present, the  
indicator should stay off  
the next time the engine is started. A driving cycle consists of a cold  
engine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving. No additional  
vehicle service is required.  
If the  
indicator remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first  
available opportunity. Although some malfunctions detected by the  
OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent, continued driving  
with the  
indicator on can result in increased emissions, lower fuel  
economy, reduced engine and transmission smoothness, and lead to more  
costly repairs.  
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing  
Some state/provincial and local governments may have  
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control  
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent  
you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M  
test if the  
indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned  
out), or if the OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission  
control systems have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicle  
is considered not ready for I/M testing.  
If the  
indicator is on or the bulb does not work, the vehicle may  
need to be serviced. Refer to the On board diagnostics (OBD-II)  
description in this chapter.  
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the  
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may  
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the  
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the ON position  
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the  
eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if  
the indicator stays on solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for  
indicator blinks  
I/M testing.  
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system  
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the  
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting  
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by 20  
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle periods.  
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the  
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The  
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,  
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If  
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will  
have to be repeated.  
POWER STEERING FLUID  
2.3L I4 engine  
3.0L V6 engine  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
4.0L V6 engine  
DR  
O
N
O
LT  
V
E
F
O
I
L
G N  
I
D
I
F
E
R
P
U L  
R
O
E
W
E
T
S
Check the power steering fluid. Refer to the service maintenance section  
for the service interval schedules.  
1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating  
temperature (the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be  
near the center of the normal area between H and C).  
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several  
times.  
3. Turn the engine off.  
4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN  
and MAX lines. Do not add fluid if the level is within this range.  
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, until it reaches  
between the MIN and MAX lines. Refer to Maintenance product  
specifications and capacities in this chapter for the proper fluid  
type.  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
BRAKE FLUID  
The fluid level will drop slowly as  
the brakes wear, and will rise when  
the brake components are replaced.  
Fluid levels between the “MIN” and  
“MAX” lines are within the normal  
operating range; there is no need to  
add fluid. If the fluid levels are  
outside of the normal operating  
range the performance of the  
system could be compromised; seek  
service from your authorized dealer  
immediately.  
CLUTCH FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)  
Check the fluid level. Refer to scheduled maintenance for the service  
interval schedules.  
During normal operation, the fluid level in the clutch reservoir should  
remain constant. If the fluid level drops, refill the fluid level to the step  
in the reservoir.  
Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid designed to meet Mazda specification.  
Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this  
chapter.  
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product  
label. For MEDICAL EMERGENCY INFORMATION contact a  
physician or Poison Control Center immediately. Failure to  
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.  
1. Clean the reservoir cap before  
removal to prevent dirt and  
water from entering the  
reservoir.  
2. Remove cap and rubber  
diaphragm from reservoir.  
3. Add fluid until the level reaches  
the step in the reservoir.  
4. Reinstall rubber diaphragm and  
cap onto reservoir.  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
TRANSMISSION FLUID  
Checking automatic transmission fluid  
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for scheduled check  
and change intervals.  
Transmission does not consume fluid.  
Check fluid when transmission is not operating properly or if you see  
a leak.  
Fluid level must be checked at normal operating temperature, 20 miles  
(30 km) of driving.  
To check and add fluid:  
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) to reach normal operating  
temperatures.  
2. If driven in hot weather, city traffic, pulling a trailer, allow  
transmission to cool for 30 minutes before checking.  
3. Engage parking brake, start engine.  
4. Put your foot on the brake pedal and move the gearshift lever slowly  
through all of the gear ranges.  
5. Shift to P (Park) and leave the engine running.  
6. Remove the dipstick, wipe clean with a dry lint free rag.  
7. Install and fully seat the dipstick into the filler tube.  
8. Remove the dipstick and inspect  
the fluid level. Level should be  
in the cross-hatched area.  
9. If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250ml) increments through the  
filler tube until the level is correct at normal operating temperatures.  
Refer to the Maintenance product specifications and capacities  
section in this chapter for the correct fluid type. The use of any  
other non-approved fluid may cause internal transmission damage.  
10. Fluid can be checked at ambient  
temperatures between 50–95°F  
(10–30°C). DO NOT ADD fluid  
until the transmission is at  
normal operating temperatures or the transmission will be overfilled.  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Low fluid level  
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid  
level is at or below the bottom of  
the dipstick.  
High fluid level  
Fluid levels above the safe range  
may cause overheating, shift and/or  
engagement concerns and internal  
transmission damage. If an overfill  
condition occurs, excess fluid should  
be removed by an authorized dealer.  
Checking and adding manual transmission fluid (if equipped)  
1. Park the vehicle on a level  
surface.  
2. Engage the parking brake fully –  
put in first gear.  
3. Ensure that the vehicle cannot  
move.  
4. Clean the filler plug.  
5. Remove the filler plug and  
inspect the fluid level.  
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
6. Fluid level should be at the  
bottom of the opening.  
7. Add enough fluid through the  
filler opening so that the fluid  
level is at the bottom of the  
opening.  
8. Install and tighten the fill plug  
securely.  
Use only fluid that meets Mazda specifications. Refer to the  
Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this  
chapter.  
TRANSFER CASE FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)  
1. Park the vehicle on a level  
surface.  
2. Engage the parking brake fully –  
put in first gear.  
3. Ensure the vehicle cannot move.  
4. Clean the filler plug.  
5. Remove the filler plug and  
inspect the fluid level.  
6. Fluid level should be at the  
bottom of the opening.  
7. Add enough fluid through the  
filler opening so that the fluid  
level is at the bottom of the  
opening.  
8. Install and tighten the fill plug  
securely.  
Use only fluid that meets Mazda specifications. Refer to the  
Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this  
chapter.  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE  
Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require  
lubrication. If the original universal joints are replaced with universal  
joints equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will also be necessary.  
CHECKING AND ADDING REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID  
1. Park the vehicle on a level  
surface.  
2. Engage the parking brake fully –  
put in first gear.  
3. Ensure the vehicle cannot move.  
4. Clean the filler plug.  
5. Remove the filler plug and  
inspect the fluid level.  
6. Fluid level should be at the  
bottom of the opening.  
7. Add enough fluid through the  
filler opening so that the fluid  
level is at the bottom of the  
opening.  
8. Install and tighten the fill plug  
securely.  
Use only fluid that meets Mazda specifications. Refer to the  
Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this  
chapter.  
AIR FILTER  
Refer to scheduled maintenance for the appropriate intervals for  
changing the air filter element.  
When changing the air filter element, only use a genuine Mazda air filter  
element.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or  
personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air  
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is  
running.  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
1. Loosen the clamp that secures the air inlet tube to the engine air  
filter cover and disconnect the tube from the cover (for V6 only).  
2. Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover.  
3. Carefully separate the two  
halves of the air filter housing.  
4. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing.  
5. Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or  
debris and to ensure good sealing.  
6. Install a new air filter element.  
Be careful not to crimp the  
filter element edges between  
the air filter housing and cover.  
This could cause filter damage  
and allow unfiltered air to enter  
the engine if not properly  
seated.  
7. Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps.  
8. Replace the air inlet tube and secure the clamp.  
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe  
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to  
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS  
Engine  
2.3L I4 engine 3.0L V6 engine 4.0L V6 engine  
Cubic inches  
Required fuel  
Firing order  
138  
87 octane  
1-3-4-2  
182  
87 octane  
1-4-2-5-3-6  
245  
87 octane  
1-4-2-5-3-6  
Spark plug gap 0.049–0.053 inch 0.051–0.057 inch 0.052–0.056 inch  
(1.25–1.35mm) (1.29–1.45mm) (1.32–1.42mm)  
Ignition system EDIS  
EDIS  
9.6:1  
EDIS  
9.7:1  
Compression  
ratio  
9.7:1  
Engine drivebelt routing  
2.3L I4 Engine without A/C (with A/C similar)  
3.0L V6 Engine without A/C  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
3.0L V6 Engine with A/C  
4.0L V6 Engine  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE  
Safety Compliance Certification Label  
The National Highway Traffic Safety  
Administration Regulations require  
that a Safety Compliance  
MFD. BY FORD MOTOR CO. IN U.S.A.  
FOR MAZDA MOTOR CORPORATION  
GVWR:XXXXXLB/ XXXXXKG  
DATE: XX/XX  
FRONT GAWR: XXXXL  
XXXXKG  
REAR GAWR:  
XXXXKG  
XXXXLB  
WITH  
TIRES  
WITH  
TIRES  
RIMS  
Certification Label be affixed to a  
vehicle and prescribe where the  
Safety Compliance Certification  
Label may be located. The Safety  
Compliance Certification Label is  
located on the structure (B-Pillar)  
by the trailing edge of the driver’s  
door or the edge of the driver’s  
door.  
XXXX/XXXXXXX  
XXXX.XX  
XXXX/XXXXXXX  
XXXX.XX  
RIMS  
AT XXX kPa/XX  
PSI COLD  
AT XXX kPa/XX  
PSI COLD  
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR  
VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN  
EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.  
VIN: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
TYPE: XXX  
XXXXX  
XXXXX  
EXT PNT:  
XX  
INT TR  
RC: XX  
AXLE  
XX  
DSO:  
WB BRK  
TP/PS  
R
X
TR SPR  
XXXXX  
XXX  
XXX  
X
XX  
X
XX  
XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX  
XXXX-XXXXXXX-XX  
Vehicle identification number (VIN)  
The vehicle identification number is  
located on the driver side  
instrument panel.  
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
Please note that in the graphic,  
XXXX is representative of your  
vehicle identification number.  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following  
information:  
1. World manufacturer identifier  
2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle  
Weight Rating (GVWR) /  
Restraint System  
3. Vehicle line, series, body type  
4. Engine type  
5. Check digit  
6. Model year  
7. Assembly plant  
8. Production sequence number  
TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE CODE DESIGNATIONS  
You can find a  
MFD. BY FORD MOTOR CO. IN U.S.A.  
FOR MAZDA MOTOR CORPORATION  
GVWR:XXXXXLB/ XXXXXKG  
transmission/transaxle code on the  
Safety Compliance Certification  
Label . The following table tells you  
which transmission or transaxle  
each code represents.  
DATE: XX/XX  
FRONT GAWR: XXXXL  
XXXXKG  
REAR GAWR:  
XXXXKG  
XXXXLB  
WITH  
TIRES  
WITH  
TIRES  
RIMS  
XXXX/XXXXXXX  
XXXX.XX  
XXXX/XXXXXXX  
XXXX.XX  
RIMS  
AT XXX kPa/XX  
PSI COLD  
AT XXX kPa/XX  
PSI COLD  
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR  
VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN  
EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.  
VIN: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
TYPE: XXX  
XXXXX  
XXXXX  
EXT PNT:  
XX  
INT TR  
RC: XX  
AXLE  
XX  
DSO:  
WB BRK  
TP/PS  
R
X
TR SPR  
XXXXX  
XXX  
XXX  
X
XX  
X
XX  
XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX  
XXXX-XXXXXXX-XX  
Description  
Code  
Five-speed automatic (5R44E/5R55E)  
Five-speed manual (HD)  
Five-speed manual (R1)  
D
J
R
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories  
CELL PHONES  
Use of cell phones and other devices by driver:  
WARNING: Use of any electrical devices such as cell phones,  
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices  
by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Dialing a  
number on a cell phone while driving also ties-up the driver’s  
hands. Use of these devices will cause the driver to be  
distracted and could lead to a serious accident. If a passenger is  
unable to use the device, pull off the right-of-way to a safe area  
before use. If use of a cell phone is necessary despite this  
warning, use a hands-free system to at least allow the hands  
free to drive the vehicle. Never use a cell phone or other  
electrical device while the vehicle is moving and, instead,  
concentrate on the full-time job of driving.  
In addition, the gasoline distributors are warning against using  
cell phones during refueling procedures, due to their increased  
concern about static electricity fires in the self-service pump  
environment.  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
A
Belt-Minder...............................82  
Booster seats ...............................96  
ABS (see Brakes) .....................151  
Air cleaner filter ...............258, 260  
Brakes ........................................151  
anti-lock ...........................151–152  
anti-lock brake system (ABS)  
Airbag supplemental restraint  
system ..........................................86  
and child safety seats ..............89  
description ................................86  
disposal ......................................91  
driver airbag ........................86, 89  
indicator light ...........................90  
operation .............................86, 89  
passenger airbag .................86, 89  
warning light ...........................153  
fluid, checking and adding ....254  
fluid, specifications .................260  
lubricant specifications ..........260  
parking ....................................153  
shift interlock ..........................156  
Break-in period .............................5  
Bulbs ............................................46  
Ambulance packages ....................7  
Antifreeze  
(see Engine coolant) ................235  
C
Cargo cage ...................................60  
Cell phone warning ...................268  
Changing a tire .........................179  
Anti-lock brake system  
(see Brakes) ......................151–152  
Anti-theft system ........................66  
Audio system  
(see Radio) ......................19, 21, 26  
Child safety restraints ................95  
child seat belts .........................95  
Automatic transmission ............156  
driving an automatic  
overdrive .................................157  
fluid, specification ..................260  
Child safety seats ........................99  
attaching with tether straps ..102  
in front seat ............................100  
in rear seat ..............................100  
tether anchorage hardware ...102  
Auxiliary input jack (Line in) ....32  
Auxiliary power point .................54  
Child safety seats - booster  
seats .............................................96  
Axle  
Chimes (warning) .......................17  
lubricant specifications ..........260  
traction lok ..............................155  
Cleaning your vehicle  
engine compartment ..............208  
instrument panel ....................211  
interior .....................................211  
Mazda car care products .......212  
plastic parts ............................210  
washing ....................................207  
waxing .....................................207  
wheels ......................................208  
B
Battery .......................................233  
acid, treating emergencies .....233  
jumping a disabled battery ....189  
maintenance-free ....................233  
servicing ..................................233  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
wiper blades ............................210  
Emergency Flashers .................168  
Emission control system ..........249  
Clock adjust  
AM/FM Stereo ...........................20  
AM/FM stereo CD .....................21  
Premium AM/FM stereo  
Engine ........................................264  
cleaning ...................................208  
coolant .....................................235  
idle speed control ...................233  
lubrication specifications .......260  
service points ..................223–225  
starting after a collision .........168  
CD6/MP3 ...................................27  
Clutch  
fluid ..........................................254  
operation while driving ..........159  
recommended shift speeds ....160  
Engine block heater .................150  
Engine oil ..................................227  
checking and adding ..............227  
dipstick ....................................227  
filter, specifications ................231  
recommendations ...................231  
specifications ..........................260  
Console ........................................54  
Coolant  
checking and adding ..............235  
refill capacities ........................240  
specifications ..........................260  
Cruise control  
(see Speed control) ....................57  
Event data recording ....................6  
Exhaust fumes ..........................149  
Customer  
Assistance ..................196–197, 199  
F
D
Foglamps .....................................42  
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles .......161  
driving off road .......................163  
electronic shift ........................162  
indicator light .........................162  
preparing to drive your  
Daytime running lamps  
(see Lamps) ................................43  
Dipstick  
engine oil .................................227  
vehicle .....................................155  
Driveline universal joint and  
slip yoke ....................................258  
Fuel ............................................241  
calculating fuel economy .......246  
cap ...........................................243  
choosing the right fuel ...........244  
comparisons with EPA fuel  
economy estimates .................249  
detergent in fuel .....................244  
filling your vehicle  
Driving under special  
conditions ..................161, 164, 166  
mud ..........................................165  
sand .........................................165  
snow and ice ...........................167  
through water .................165, 167  
with fuel ..................241, 243, 246  
filter, specifications ................241  
fuel pump shut-off switch .....168  
improving fuel economy ........246  
E
Emergencies, roadside  
jump-starting ..........................189  
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
octane rating ...................245, 264  
quality ......................................245  
running out of fuel .................245  
safety information relating to  
cluster ........................................12  
lighting up panel and  
interior .......................................43  
location of components ............12  
automotive fuels .....................241  
J
Fuel pump shut-off switch .......168  
Fuses ..................................169–170  
Jack ............................................179  
positioning ...............................179  
storage .............................179, 182  
G
Jump-starting your vehicle ......189  
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............243  
K
Gas mileage  
(see Fuel economy) .................246  
Keys .......................................62, 67  
positions of the ignition .........146  
Gauges .........................................17  
L
H
Lamps  
bulb replacement  
Hazard flashers .........................168  
Headlamps ...................................42  
aiming ........................................44  
bulb specifications ....................46  
daytime running lights .............43  
flash to pass ..............................43  
high beam .................................42  
replacing bulbs .........................47  
turning on and off ....................42  
specifications chart ..................46  
daytime running light ...............43  
fog lamps ...................................42  
headlamps .................................42  
headlamps, flash to pass ..........43  
instrument panel, dimming .....43  
interior lamps .....................46–47  
replacing bulbs .........................47  
Lane change indicator  
Heating  
(see Turn signal) ........................46  
heating and air conditioning  
system .................................39–40  
Lights, warning and indicator ....12  
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........153  
Hood ..........................................222  
Load limits .................................129  
Loading instructions .................135  
I
Locks  
Ignition ...............................146, 264  
Infant seats (see Safety seats) ..99  
doors ..........................................62  
Lubricant specifications ...........260  
Lug nuts ....................................187  
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)  
testing ........................................251  
M
Instrument panel  
cleaning ...................................211  
Manual transmission .................159  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
lubricant specifications ..........260  
reverse .....................................160  
illuminated entry ......................65  
locking/unlocking doors ...........63  
panic alarm ...............................63  
replacing the batteries .............64  
Mirrors .........................................56  
fold away ...................................57  
side view mirrors  
S
(power) ...............................56–57  
Motorcraft parts ........................241  
Safety defects, reporting ..........206  
Safety restraints ..............71, 75–79  
Belt-Minder.............................82  
extension assembly ..................80  
for adults .............................76–79  
for children .........................94–95  
Occupant Classification  
Sensor ........................................73  
seat belt maintenance ..............80  
warning light and chime ..........81  
O
Octane rating ............................245  
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................227  
Overdrive ...............................59–60  
Overheating ...............................188  
P
Safety restraints - tether  
anchors ......................................102  
Parking brake ............................153  
Safety seats for children ............99  
Passenger Occupant  
Classification Sensor ...................73  
Safety Compliance  
Certification Label ....................266  
Power distribution box  
(see Fuses) ...............................173  
Satellite Radio Information ........35  
Scheduled Maintenance ...........213  
Seat Belt Maintenance ...............80  
Power door locks ........................62  
Power mirrors .......................56–57  
Power point .................................54  
Seat belts (see Safety  
restraints) ........................71, 75–79  
Power steering ..........................154  
fluid, checking and adding ....252  
fluid, specifications .................260  
Seats ............................................69  
child safety seats ......................99  
Power Windows ...........................55  
SecuriLock passive anti-theft  
system ..........................................66  
Preparing to drive your  
vehicle ........................................155  
Servicing your vehicle ..............221  
Setting the clock  
R
AM/FM stereo ...........................20  
AM/FM stereo CD .....................21  
Premium AM/FM stereo  
Radio ................................19, 21, 26  
Relays ........................................169  
Remote entry system .................63  
CD6/MP3 ...................................27  
Snowplowing .................................7  
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Spark plugs, specifications .......264  
Special notice  
ambulance conversions ..............7  
utility-type vehicles ....................7  
recreational towing .................144  
trailer towing ..........................135  
wrecker ....................................195  
Traction-lok rear axle ...............155  
Transfer case  
fluid checking .........................257  
Specification chart,  
lubricants ...................................260  
Transmission  
Speed control ..............................57  
automatic operation ...............156  
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....156  
fluid, checking and adding  
(manual) .................................256  
lubricant specifications ..........260  
manual operation ....................159  
Starting your  
vehicle ........................146–147, 149  
jump starting ..........................189  
Steering wheel  
tilting .........................................54  
Turn signal ..................................46  
T
V
Tether anchors ..........................102  
Tilt steering wheel ......................54  
Vehicle Identification Number  
(VIN) ..........................................266  
Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System (TPMS)  
Roadside Emergencies ...........179  
Tires, Wheels and Loading ....124  
Vehicle loading ..........................129  
camper bodies ........................145  
Ventilating your vehicle ...........149  
Tires ...........................108–109, 179  
alignment ................................117  
care ..........................................113  
changing ..........................179, 184  
checking the pressure ............113  
inflating ...................................110  
label .........................................123  
replacing ..................................114  
rotating ....................................117  
safety practices .......................116  
sidewall information ...............119  
snow tires and chains ............129  
spare tire .................................180  
terminology .............................110  
tire grades ...............................109  
treadwear ........................109, 113  
W
Warning chimes ...........................17  
Warning lights (see Lights) .......12  
Washer fluid ..............................226  
Water, Driving through .............167  
Windows  
power .........................................55  
Windshield washer fluid and  
wipers ..........................................53  
checking and adding fluid .....226  
checking and cleaning ............226  
replacing wiper blades ...........227  
Towing .......................................135  
Wrecker towing .........................195  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Legacy Car Audio Car Stereo System LR121SX User Manual
Lenoxx Electronics Heat Pump 13HPD User Manual
LG Electronics Flat Panel Television 19LH20 User Manual
Life Fitness Home Gym 805 User Manual
Lightolier Work Light C7P38MHA User Manual
Lincoln Electric Welder DC 400 User Manual
LumiSource Indoor Furnishings LS CL X User Manual
Makita Nail Gun AN8300 User Manual
Memorex DVD Player MVD4543 User Manual
Meyer Sound Speaker UMS SM User Manual